© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
1
VU
ENG 101
Professor Dr. Surriya Shaffi Mir
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
2
VU
Table of Contents:
Lecture No. | Topic | Page No. |
Lecture No.01 | Reading and Dictionary | 4 |
Lecture No.02 | Pronunciation | 12 |
Lecture No.03 | Reading for Main Idea | 16 |
Lecture No.04 | Reading: Topic, Main Idea | 20 |
Lecture No.05 | Reading: References | 25 |
Lecture No.06 | Reading Skills | 30 |
Lecture No.07 | Reading and Vocabulary | 36 |
Lecture No.08 | Word Formation- Prefixes | 43 |
Lecture No.09 | Reading: Description, Locating Information | 51 |
Lecture No.10 | Reading: Word Forms | 59 |
Lecture No.11 | Reading: Understanding Reading | 66 |
Lecture No.12 | Reading: Making Inferences | 73 |
Lecture No.13 | Reading: Assessing the Text | 80 |
Lecture No.14 | Reading: Assessing Texts | 86 |
Lecture No.15 | Evaluating Texts: Interpreting Visual Data | 91 |
Lecture No.16 | Reading: Evaluating Texts | 102 |
Lecture No.17 | Reading: Cloze for Comprehension | 109 |
Lecture No.18 | Reading: Skimming and Scanning | 116 |
Lecture No.19 | Reading: Scanning and Language Functions | 123 |
Lecture No.20 | Reading: Classifying, Cause and Effect Relationship | 130 |
Lecture No.21 | Reading: Presenting Information Graphically | 138 |
Lecture No.22 | Writing: Sentence Types | 147 |
Lecture No.23 | Writing: Effective Sentences: Unity, Coherence, Emphasis | 155 |
Lecture No.24 | WRITING: IDENTIFYING SENTENCE ERRORS | 160 |
Lecture No.25 | WRITING: REVISING SENTENCE ERRORS | 165 |
Lecture No.26 | Subject Verb Agreement | 171 |
Lecture No.27 | Writing | 177 |
Lecture No.28 | Word Choice | 184 |
Lecture No.29 | Punctuation | 192 |
Lecture No.30 | Writing: Paragraphs: Structural Parts | 201 |
Lecture No.31 | Writing: Paragraph | 205 |
Lecture No.32 | Writing: Paragraphs | 211 |
Lecture No.33 | Writing: Essay Writing | 218 |
Lecture No.34 | Essay writing | 223 |
Lecture No.35 | Writing: Essay Outlines | 229 |
Lecture No.36 | Writing: Selecting and Researching an Essay Topic | 235 |
Lecture No.37 | Writing: Ways of Organizing Texts: Linear | 241 |
Lecture No.38 | Writing: Ways of Organizing Texts | 245 |
Lecture No.39 | Writing: Ways of Organizing Texts | 249 |
Lecture No.40 | Writing Skills | 253 |
Lecture No.41 | Writing: Summary Writing | 258 |
Lecture No.42 | Grammar and Usage: Tenses and Passive Sentences | 262 |
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
3
VU
Lecture No.43 | Grammar and Usage: Word Order: Adverbs | 269 |
Lecture No.44 | Grammar and Usage: Articles | 277 |
Lecture No.45 | Language Functions: Language Forms and Functions | 286 |
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
4
VU
Lesson -01
Reading and Dictionary
This lesson is in two parts. In the first part, you will learn about the:
In the second part of the lesson, you will read an interesting story.
Definition of Dictionary
A dictionary is a book that not only lists and records the words of a language but it also tells you how speakers of the language spell, pronounce, define, explain and use the words of their language.
Reference Book - provides useful information. It is valuable only if you learn how to use it correctly and efficiently.
List of Dictionary Uses (9)
The following is a list of things that can be learned from a dictionary:
ix) General information.
i)
Spelling
Many students find English spelling very confusing. So what do you do? Consult your dictionary. It will clarify your confusion by showing you the different spellings of the same word.
Look at the words catalogue and theatre. You must have noticed that the dictionary lists both BRE and AE/US spelling of the words. Both are correct.
Exercise (i) Spelling:
Use the dictionary to answer the following questions about spelling.
5
VU
Centre Color
(ii)
Pronunciation
Students have problems in pronouncing English words. A dictionary will help you learn the pronunciation of any word but only if you are familiar with the symbols in which they are written. We will discuss this in greater detail in the next lesson.
All language dictionaries carry a pronunciation key/table. Be sure to read it.
(iii)
Part of speech
All dictionaries indicate the part of speech a word belongs to - whether the word is commonly used as a Noun, Pronoun, Verb (transitive, intransitive), Adjective, Adverb, Conjunction, or Preposition etc.
iv) Origin of Words
Some dictionaries indicate the origin and derivation of a word before it became an English word.
The most important information that a dictionary provides about a word is its meaning. Most of the words have many meanings or shades of meaning. Do not just read the first listed meaning of the word you are looking for. Go down the numbered list. Look for the meaning that best suits the context in which the word is used.
Also look up words above and below the word that you are looking for. You will find that words are often closely related. It will help to extend your recognition of the word in other forms and contexts.
Exercise (v-a) Meaning:
Look up the words ‘fast’ and ‘set’ in a dictionary. Write the total number of different meanings of each word. Include all the numbered and lettered meanings for each part of speech.
Exercise (v-b): Meaning/ Explanation / Definition of words.
Use the dictionary to find the specific meanings of the word ‘play’ in each of the following:
6. A ‘week without water can make one weak’ is a play on words.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
6
VU
(vi) Usage/Restrictive Labels
A dictionary uses different labels like Br (British), Am (American), fml (formal), infml (informal), col (colloquial), pl (plural), poetic (poetic), sl (slang).This information is important in writing.
A dictionary will tell you the usage of words and phrases, idioms / proverbs of the language. It will also tell you about the limitations of the use of the word. Special labels are used to show this. If a word is no longer in current use it will be labelled archaic (arch) or obsolete (obs). Other labels will tell you of the level of usage: whether the word has literary flavour (poetic) or is slang (sl), formal (fml) informal (infml).
Exercise( vi-a )Usage Restrictive Labels:
Idioms / Two-word Verbs / Phrasal Verbs / Noun Phrase
Look up the underlined words in the dictionary and write their meanings.
Exercise (vi-b) Restrictive or Usage Labels:
a)
Look up the following words / phrases in the dictionary. Write whether its use is primarily slang, informal or colloquial.
Guys Cool
Example:
Will it be O.K. if I meet you in the library about eight?
Label: Colloquial
Meaning: All Right
Similar and opposite meanings of words are also given but not in all dictionaries.
Dictionaries define / explain many common foreign words and phrases, either with the main entries or in a special section at the back.
Exercise(viii)Foreign Words & Phrases:
Look up each of these foreign words or phrases. Write its English meaning.
etcetera, e.g., et al., a prior, coup d’état, per se.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
VU
This section varies from dictionary to dictionary. Names of important persons, places, countries, nationalities, are listed either in the alphabetical order of words or in special sections at the back. Some dictionaries may include rules for spelling, punctuation, list of common first names in English, systems of weights and measures, conversion tables, etc.
How to use a dictionary:
Learning what a dictionary contains and how it is used will save much of your time.
Step I: Know the correct order of the letters of the English alphabet.
Step 2: Finding Words Quickly
down that page for the word.
Guide Words
RECAP
of the language.
This concludes the first part of the lesson1. Now we move to the second part which, I hope you will enjoy.
7
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
8
VU
First we are going to show you the text of a story.You will read a folk tale from North America. The story is about a natural event.
Raven and the Coming of Daylight
(Gail Robinson and Douglas Hill)
When the earth was very young, it was dark and old like a winter’s night through all the year’s seasons. Gull was the Custodian of Daylight, and he kept it locked tight in a cedar box beneath his wing. Being Custodian made Gull feel very important, and he was not going to lose his position by letting Daylight out of the box.
“He is too vain!” screeched Owl, at a meeting of the People upon Meeting Hill. “We can never travel, in this darkness, to our half-homes in this south,” cried
Robin. Her breast was bleached of colour for the lack of light.
Gull agreed to come to the meeting. But it was clear, when he came, that he was not going to change his mind or listen to what Raven said. He had come only because it made him feel even more important to have Raven pleading with him.
“I was made Custodian of Daylight in the beginning of things,” said Gull. “I am to keep Daylight safe. And I will keep it safe.” And he curved his swing tighter around the cedar box.
Raven had run out of words to make Gull see the People’s need for light. He thought angrily to himself, “I wish this Gull would step on a large thorn.”
No sooner had he shaped this thought than Gull cried out, “Squee! My foot!” “A thorn, Cousin?” asked raven innocently. “Let me see-I will take it out for you.”
But of course it was so dark that he could not see the thorn to remove it. “I must have light to take out the thorn,” said Raven.
“Light? Never!” said Gull. “Then the thorn will remain.”
Gull complained and hopped on one foot and wept, and he finally opened his cedar box a crack, a crack so narrow that out glanced a shaft of light no brighter than a single star.
Raven put his hand to Gull’s foot, then pretended not to see the thorn. Instead, he pushed it in deeper.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
9
VU
“Squee!” cried Gull. “My foot!”
“More light, more light!” shouted Raven.
And the lid of the box raised a further crack, so that light gleamed forth like a winter moon. Then Raven reached again for the thorn and pushed it even further into the soft flesh of Gull’s foot.
“More light!” roared Raven.
“Squee, squee, squee!” screamed Gull, and in his pain he flung off the lid of the cedar box.
Like a molten fish the sun slithered from the box, and light and warmth blazed out over the world.
Nor was it ever to be recaptured, no matter how loudly or how sadly Gull called to it to return to its safe hiding place beneath his wing.
Now after reading the story answer the following questions.
Q1. Read the four statements given below. Select the one which best expresses the main idea of the story.
a)
b)
c)
d)
The removal of the thorn from the Raven’s foot.
The meeting of birds and animals upon Meeting Hill. The release of daylight over the earth.
The capture of daylight in the cedar box.
‘C’ is the correct statement. “The release of daylight over the earth”.
Q2. Read the following statements: Write T if it is true or F if it is false.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Raven and Gull are birds. Gull and Raven are related.
Raven felt important being custodian of Daylight. Daylight was kept under a wing.
Raven pushed a thorn into Gull’s foot.
Gull at once opened the box for Raven to see the thorn. The sun slipped out of the box.
Gail Robinson is the author of the tale.
Statements a, b and g are true. Statements c, d, e, f and h are false.
Try to answer the following questions:
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
10
VU
It is an ancient story containing magical and religious ideas. It describes an early attempt of mankind to understand their surroundings and to give meaning to life.
An honest, plain sensible Country Mouse is said to have entertained in his hole, one day, a fine Mouse of the Town. Having formerly been playfellows together, they were old acquaintances, which served as an apology for the visit. However, as master of the house, he thought himself obliged to do the honours of it, in all respects, and to make as great a stranger of his guest as he possibly could. In order to do this, he set before him a reserve of delicate grey peas and meat, a dish of fine oatmeal, some parings of new cheese, and to crown all, with a dessert, a remnant of a charming mellow apple. In good manners her forbore to eat any himself, lest the stranger should not have enough, but, that he might seem to bear the other company, sat and nibbled a piece of wheaten straw very busily. At last, said the spark of the town, “Old Crony, give me leave to be a little free with you: how can you bear to live in this nasty, dirty, melancholy hole here, with nothing but woods, and meadows, and mountains, and rivulets about you?
Do you not prefer the conversation of the world to the chirping of birds; and the splendour of a court to the rude aspect of an uncultivated desert? Come, take my word for it, you will find it a change for the better. Never stand considering, but away this moment. Remember we are not immortal, and therefore we have no time to lose. Make sure of to-day, and spend it as agreeably as you can; you know not what may happen tomorrow.” In short, these and suchlike arguments prevailed, and his country acquaintance was resolved to go to town that night. So they both set out upon their journey together, proposing to sneak in after the close of the evening. They did so, and about midnight made their entry into a certain great house, where there had been an extraordinary entertainment the day before, and several titbits, which some of the servants has purloined, were hid under the seat of a window. The country guest was immediately placed in the midst of a rich Persian carpet: and now it was the courtier’s turn to entertain, who indeed acquitted himself in that capacity with the utmost readiness and address, changing the courses as elegantly, and tasting everything first as judiciously as any clerk of the kitchen.
The other sat and enjoyed himself like a delighted epicure, tickled tot he last degree with this new turn of his affairs; when, on sudden, a noise of somebody opening the door made them start from their seats, and scuttle in confusion about the dining-room. Our country friend, in particular, was ready to die with fear at the barking of a huge mastiff or two, which opened their throats just about the same time, and made the whole house echo. At last recovering himself. “Well,” said he, “if this be your town life, much good may it do you; give me my poor quiet hole again, with my homely, but comfortable grey peas.”
Does the fable teach you any lesson?
Possible answer: To each his own environment.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
11
VU
How important are Freedom and Security in life?
Reading exercises:
Just read the stories — Do not look up the meanings of words in the dictionary.
This brings us to the end of our first lesson.
Let us recapitulate/ recall what we learnt today:
Consult your reading package for assignments related to the first lesson. Your next lesson will deal with using the dictionary for learning pronunciation of English words.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
12
VU
Lesson -02 Pronunciation
This lesson is about the usage of a dictionary to know the pronunciation of English words. The students of English are often worried about English pronunciation because spellings of English words often cause confusion. The students generally face difficulty to pronounce a word correctly after they read it.
This lesson is in two parts. In the first part, you will be familiarized with a set of special symbols known as phonemic symbols that are used to indicate each speech sound.
The second part of the lesson consists of a few exercises.
Look at the following words:
Chorus | k | sound |
Church | chey | sound |
Ration | sh | sound |
Machine | sh | sound |
The word ‘chorus’ which begins with the letters ch is pronounced with the 'k' sound while in the word church the letters ch is pronounced as the Urdu/Punjabi letter : .
e.g. In the word ‘ration’,- tion is pronounced as ‘sh’ while in the word ‘machine’- ‘ch’ is also pronounced as ‘sh’
Remember that the phonemic symbols are given in slash brackets in the dictionary. / /
Now try to say these words louder. Pay special attention to the shape of your mouth and lips.
Short Vowels (7) Long Vowels (5)
Notice that the symbols for long vowels have two small dots in front of them.
Next we have 8 diphthong vowels. These are sounds which are produced by combining two vowel sounds. There is a movement or glide from one vowel sound to another.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
13
VU
So there are 20 vowel phonemes in English. (7 short, 5 long and 8 diphthongs).
Now we will look at the consonant sounds / phonemes. In English there are 24 consonant sounds. These are the sounds produced by the complete or partial stoppage of breath.
Now repeat after me.
Another area closely related with English pronunciation is STRESS.
Stress
Stress is the extra force used in pronouncing or speaking a particular word. A dictionary will indicate stress by a tiny mark on the top of a word like this: `
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
14
VU
When you look up a word in the dictionary, be sure to learn where the stress falls on the word. E.g.:
– In these examples the first part of the word is stressed.
There are some words in English which have the same spelling but belong to different parts of speech because they are stressed differently. E.g.
`rebel (n) re`bel (v)
The r`ebels laid down their arms. Children re`bel against their parents.
`present (n)
`present (adj) Pre`sent (v)
The `present was lovely.
Were you `present at the party? Please pre`sent your work.
Read the following passage.
COMPUTERS IN OUR DAILY LIVES
Computers are now an integral part of our lives. Many things, public or private, that we do during the course of the day are affected by them. Visit any public organization or office, from hospitals to schools, from the meteorological bureau to the stock exchange, etc. and you are sure to come across people working at computers. Gone are the days when entries were made manually in registers and ledgers at the bank. Now all monetary transactions are conducted by the computer.
Most films and TV advertisements use graphics or pictures produced with the help of a computer. There is hardly a sphere of life that does not involve the use of a computer.
Even when you go out on personal errands, to the travel agent to buy an airline ticket or book a seat on the inter city bus, to the shopping plaza or a grocery store, the man behind the counter uses a computer equipped with laser and bar code technology to scan the price of each item you put before him and then uses it to add up the price to present you with a total, all within few minutes.
A bar code is a pattern of thick and thin lines and spaces that represent characters that can be read by a scanner. The bar code identifies the item to which it is affixed; the scanner transfers the signal to a computer that matches the code to a price or inventory unit.
Computers are no longer things only encountered outside the home; they are very much a part of the household items. One cannot imagine a world without computers.
Exercise I:
The passage will be read out a second time. As you read this passage you will see a list of words on your TV screen.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
15
VU
Tick only the words that you hear being read.
Exercise II:
You may face difficulty in using the right stress for the following words. Use dictionary to find where the stress falls in the each word:
1. Advertisement | 6.Computer | 10. Meteorological |
2. Affected | 7.Exchange | 11. Technology |
3. Affixed | 8.Inventory | 12. Thick |
4. Bureau | 9.Manually | 13. Transactions |
5. Character | | |
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
16
VU
Lesson -03
Reading for Main Idea
Lesson 3 is devoted to develop your reading skills. It is the most important skill that you will need for success in your studies. If you read inaccurately you will miss some of the information or ideas that you read. If you read slowly, you will unnecessarily spend a lot of time in reading, so your other work will suffer.
Your ability to read English rapidly and accurately depends upon purposeful practice. This lesson will introduce you the ways by which you can improve your reading skills. You learn to read by reading. You must continue to practice on your own later.
This lesson is in three parts. In the first part you will learn to identify the topic of a paragraph, in the second part you will learn to pick the main idea of the paragraph and in the last part you will learn to recognize details which support the main idea.
Topic of a paragraph
If you are able to identify the topic of a paragraph it will go a long way in developing your reading ability. A good reader is quickly able to identify the topic of a paragraph.
What is the topic of a paragraph? It is the subject of the whole paragraph — i.e. what the whole paragraph is about. It can usually be expressed in a word or two. When you read a paragraph ask yourself the question: What is the writer trying to say or discuss throughout the paragraph? And the answer that comes up (from your heart or mind) will surely be the answer.
Here are a number of short paragraphs taken from different text books. At the end of each paragraph three or four possible answers are given. Select one which you consider is the topic of the paragraph.
Text 1:
New species of plants are being discovered every year. It is estimated that the yearly average, for the higher groups of plants alone is approximately 4700 proposed new species. It is obviously necessary, from practical as well as scientific standpoint that attention be given to the naming and the proper classification of the vast assemblage of plants, both native and cultivated. The scientists who do these things are systematic botanists or taxonomists. Most certainly it is essential for those working on the various fields of plant science- whether they are agriculturists, florists, foresters, physiologists or morphologists- to know which plants they are dealing; they must know their proper scientific names and their relationships. (Robbins et al., Botany, p. 7.)
Text2:
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
17
VU
The term Groups has long been a pivotal concept of sociology. A group is any number of human beings in reciprocal communications. It may be well to emphasize certain aspects and implications of this short definition which beginning students, as well as some sociologists themselves, frequently overlook or do not appreciate fully. First, a group refers only to persons in communication. Mere physical closeness, if there is not communication, does not make a group. The communication creates the group, not the mere fact of spatial proximity or physical contact. Second, a group maybe of any size from two persons, to theoretically and potentially the entire population of the world. Third, communication need not be face-to-face or by “word of mouth”; it may be indirect through writing or at long range through such instruments as the telegraph.
(Cuber, Sociology, p.273.)
Text 3:
Plants absorb water and mineral salts from the soil; they take in oxygen and carbon dioxide from the atmosphere. They manufacture sugars, starches, fats, proteins, and scores of other substances; they conduct materials from one part of the plant to another; they respire, they grow; they react to the environment in which they live; they reproduce. In short, plants carry on a number of activities; they do work; they have functions. Plant physiology is the area of botany concerned with the study of these activities and functions.
(Robinsetal., Botany, p. 9)
Topic:
Now here is a short exercise to test what you have learnt.
Topic sentences are given, followed by three statements. Choose the statement that best expresses the topic sentence. The first one is done for you.
1. TOPIC SENTENCE
The Nile, the largest river in Egypt, is unique because it:
A.
B.
C.
describes where Egypt is. explains why the river is unique
compares the Nile with other large rivers.
The correct answer is B — explains why the river is unique.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
18
VU
2. TOPIC SENTENCE
A little-known story about M.A. Jinnah tells about his manner of thinking.
A.
B.
C.
Describes the passing of the Lahore Resolution. Summarizes Jinnah’s speech at Lahore, March 1940. Relates the “Little Known Story”.
3. TOPIC SENTENCE
If you want to spend your holidays in a truly unique place, the northern areas of Pakistan are just the place for you.
A.
B.
C.
Identifies the place and explain its uniqueness.
Explains the physical and emotional importance of holidays. Relates the history of the Pushtoons.
Text 4:
TOPIC SENTENCE
The development of speech in infants follows a definite sequence or patterns of development.
Details:
A.
By the time an infant is six months old, he or she can make twelve different speech
sounds.
B. Before the age of three months, most infants are unable to produce any recognizable syllables.
C During the first year, the number of vowel sounds a child can produce is greater than the number of consonant sounds he can make.
Text 5:
TOPIC SENTENCE
In some parts of the world, famine is a constant human condition and exists due to a variety of causes.
Details:
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
19
VU
C.
Advances in medicine have increased life expectancies, keeping more people active for longer periods of time.
Agricultural technology has not made substantial advances in increasing the food supply.
Due to growth of cities, population has become denser, and the agricultural support for these population centers is not available.
D.
E.
Text 6:
TOPIC SENTENCE
An individual deals with anxiety in a variety of ways and produces a wide range of responses.
Details:
A.
Anxiety may manifest itself by such physical symptoms as increased heart activity or labored breathing.
Fear, unlike anxiety, is a response to real or threatened danger.
Psychologically, anxiety often produces a feeling of powerlessness, or lack of direct control over the immediate environment.
Temporary blindness, deafness, or the loss of the sensation of touch is examples of extreme physical responses to anxiety.
Some people cannot cope with anxiety and are unable to control the neurotic behavior associated with anxiety.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Before we end the lesson, let me go over what you have learnt in today’s lesson. In today’s lesson you have learnt three important skills related with reading.
- First, to identify the topic of a paragraph.
- Second, to select the main idea of the paragraph, and
-Third, to recognize the details which support the main idea.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
20
VU
Lesson -04
Reading: Topic, Main Idea
In this lesson we will practice skills learnt in previous lessons. These skills are:
The given text is about computers. It consists of six paragraphs. Read the text once through without stopping. As you read the text you will come across many words and expressions that you are not familiar with. Do not be upset. Keep on reading. In your second reading, pause after every paragraph and ask yourself - what the paragraph is about? You will find that each paragraph has a topic, a main or a primary idea and / or secondary ideas that support the main idea.
What is a computer?
1- A computer is a machine with an intricate network of electronic circuits that operate switches or magnetize tiny metal cores. The switches, like the cores, are capable of being in one of two possible states, that is, on or off: magnetized or demagnetized. The machine is capable of storing and manipulating numbers, letters, and characters. The basic idea of a computer is that we can make the machine do what we want by inputting signals that turn certain switches on and turn others, off, or that magnetizes or de- magnetizes the cores.
4. Some of the most common methods of inputting information are to sue punched
cards, magnetic tape, disks and terminals. The computer’s input device (which might be
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
21
VU
a card reader, a tape drive or disk drive, depending on the medium used in putting information) reads the information into the computer. For outputting information, two common devices used are a printer which prints the new information on paper, or a CRT display screen which shows the results on a TV-like screen.
(N. Mullen & P. Brown: English for Computer Science; OUP 16-18)
Paragraph 1:
A computer is a machine with an intricate network of electronic circuits that operate switches or magnetize tiny metal cores. The switches, like the cores, are capable of being in one of two possible states, that is, on or off: magnetized or demagnetized. The machine is capable of storing and manipulating numbers, letters, and characters. The basic idea of a computer is that we can make the machine do what we want by inputting signals that turn certain switches on and turn others, off, or that magnetizes or de-magnetizes the cores.
Topic: A computer is a machine.
Main Idea: We can make the machine do what we want it to do.
Supporting Idea: Machine is capable of storing and manipulating numbers letters, and characters.
Paragraph 2:
The basic job of computers is the processing of information. For this reason, computers can be defined as a device which accepts information in the form of instructions called a program and characters called data, perform mathematical and / or logical operations on the information, and then supply results of these operations. The program, or part of it, which tells the computers what to do and also provides the information needed to solve the problem, is kept inside the computer in a place called memory.
Topic: Processing of information.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
22
VU
Main Idea: The program, which tells the computer what to do and stores the information, is called memory.
12
Paragraph 3:
Computers are thought to have many remarkable powers. However, the most of computers, whether large or small have three basic capabilities. First, Computers have circuits of performing arithmetic operations, such as: addition, subtraction, division, multiplication and exponentiation. Second, computers have a means of communicating with the user. After all, if we couldn’t feed information in and get results back, these machines wouldn’t be of much use. However, certain computers (commonly minicomputers and microcomputers) are used to control directly things such as robots, aircraft's navigation systems, medical instruments, etc.
Topic: Powers of computers.
Main Idea: Three basic capabilities of computers
Supporting Idea: Computers are used to control robots, aircraft navigation systems, medical instruments, etc.
Paragraph 4:
Some of the most common methods of inputting information are to sue punched cards, magnetic tape, disks and terminals. The computer’s input device (which might be a card reader, a tape drive or disk drive, depending on the medium used in putting information) reads the information into the computer. For outputting information, two common devices used are a printer which prints the new information on paper, or a CRT display screen which shows the results on a TV-like screen.
Topic: Method of inputting information.
Main Idea: Input and Output devices. Supporting Idea: Examples of devices. 14
Paragraph 5:
Computers have circuits which can make decisions. The kinds of decisions which computer circuits can make are not of the type: ‘Who would win a war between two countries?’ or ‘Who is the richest person in the world?’ Unfortunately, the computer can only decide three things, namely: Is one number less than another? Are tow numbers equal? Is one number greater than another?
Topic: Circuits that make decisions.
Main Idea: Computer can only make logical decision
Paragraph 6:
A computer can solve a series of problems and make hundreds, even thousands, of logical decisions without becoming tired or bored. It can find the solution of a problem in a fraction of time. A computer can replace people in dull, routine tasks, but it has no originality; it works according to the instructions given to it and cannot exercise any valuable judgments. There are times when a computer seems to operate like a mechanical ‘brain’, but its achievements are limited by the minds of human beings. A computer cannot do anything unless a person tells it to do something and give it the appropriate information; but as electric pulses can move at the speed of light, a computer can carry out vast numbers
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
23
VU
of arithmetic-logical operations almost instantaneously. A person can do everything a computer can do, but in many cases that person would be dead long before the job was finished.
Topic: Speed at which a computer works
Main Idea: A computer works according to instructions.
Supporting Idea: Computer operations are limited.
Main idea
Now that you have read each paragraph in detail, let us look at the text as a whole.
Read the following four statements and choose the statement that best expresses the main idea.
Which statement did you choose? The correct answer is choice no.2 Why didn’t you select the other choices?
The other choices do not give the distinctive characteristics of what a computer is i.e. the
main idea of the passage. They simply provide the details.
Understanding the Passage:
Decide if these statements are true or false by referring to the text. T F
information to do so.
Statements no. 1, 4 and 8 are false. These false statements can be made true by making necessary changes.
1. Computer can store or handle any data which is input.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
24
VU
4. All computers can perform arithmetic operations, make comparisons and output information.
8. Computer can decide only these things:
-Is one number less than another?
Content Review
The following statements are all taken from the text you have just read. Certain words are missing in these statements. Complete these statements with the appropriate words from the word bank given below. Make sure that you use the correct form i.e. singular or plural. Some words can be used more than once.
core device
programme memory
data medium
circuit terminal switch CRT display
or magnetized .
and can store this information in a .
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
25
VU
Lesson -05
Connectives and Link Words: References
In the last lesson you were introduced to two new terms: References and Connectives. The sentences and paragraphs are not words, just put together; they express ideas which are connected to each other. In this lesson, you will practice to recognize these words and phrases i.e. references and connectives that link ideas in a sentence.
These words make the text smoother to read. Your reading speed and comprehension will increase considerably if you are able to recognize the links between and within the sentences. References are sometimes relative pronouns, sometimes demonstrative pronouns, or adverbs. Sometimes they are substitutes for words that have come earlier or will come later.
We will first look at references within a text. Read the following seven sentences given below. Notice the reference words are italicized and the connectives are underlined. The first five have been done for you. Connect the last two on your own.
Text 1:
Connectives:
Now you will look at another kind of link which is made by conjunctions that join ideas into some kind of relationship within the text. These words or phrases are also known as transitional markers that connect ideas together. They indicate:
Link words: References and Connectives:
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
26
VU
1. Words that signal RESULT: | |||
thus | therefore | as a consequence | |
hence | accordingly | consequently | |
2. Words that signal a CONTRAST: | |||
but | in contrast | conversely | however |
instead | nevertheless | yet | still |
even | though | although | despite |
in spite of
on the other hand on the contrary
3. Words that show COMPARISON:
like | likewise | as well | just as |
just like | similarly | like manner | equally |
as Examples: | in the same way | in a similar fashion | |
4. Words that show ILLUSTRATION / EXAMPLE:
for example | to illustrate | once | |
for instance | such as | including | |
5. Words that show CAUSE AND EFFECT: | |||
thus | because | because of | consequently |
since | result | therefore | accordingly |
as a result | so | if…then | |
6. Words that show A SERIES / TIME:
one, first | next | as |
two, second | before | now |
three, third | after | until |
since | soon | previously |
lastly | afterward | finally |
then | often | immediately |
while | during | frequently |
at last | | |
Examples:
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
27
VU
7. Words that show ADDITION:
and | also | and…too | besides |
being | furthermore | one | in addition |
first of all | also | second | secondly |
third | thirdly | another | next finally |
You will now look at two sample paragraphs. In the first paragraph the references are highlighted and the connectives are underlined. The arrows connect the references to the ideas they relate to.
Sample 1
Some people, of course, still believe that Shakespeare could not have written the plays attributed to him, but they have difficulty in explaining the fact that many contemporaries of Shakespeare, who knew and worked with him, considered him, first, as the actual author, and second, a very fine author indeed. Ben Johnson, for example, never doubted the authenticity of the plays. William Green also referred to Shakespeare as a very fine playwright. These are only two of the many contemporary references that leave little doubt that Shakespeare wrote the plays of William Shakespeare.
(Yorkey: p. 133)
Sample 1 – A
References
Shakespeare (1) few contemporaries Shakespeare (2)
Shakespeare (2)
Ben Johnson, William Green
Connectives
Sample 2
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
28
VU
A computer like any other machine is used because it does certain jobs better and more efficiently than humans. It can receive more information and process it faster than any human. The speed at which a computer works can replace weeks or even months of pencil - and - paper work. Therefore, computers are used when the time saved offsets their cost which is one of the many reasons they are used so much in business, industry and research.
(N. Mullen & P. Brown: English for Computer Science p. 21 -22)
Sample 2 - A
computer
like any other machine, is used because information
computers
the time saved offsets their cost computers
Exercise 1
In the following paragraphs some words are highlighted. Draw a box around the word that the bold words refer to. Then join the circle and the box with arrows. Also, underline any transitional or connective word in the paragraph.
Paragraph 1:
Computers are electronic machines that process information. They are capable of communicating with the user, of doing different kinds of arithmetic operations and of making three kinds of decisions. However, they are incapable of thinking. They accept data and instructions as input, and after processing it they output the results.
Paragraph 2:
When talking about computers, both hardware and software need to be considered. The former refers to the actual machinery, whereas the later refers to the programs which control and coordinate the activities of the hard ware while processing the data.
Paragraph 3:
The first computer was built in 1930 but since then computer technology has evolved a great deal. There are three different kinds of computers in use today: the mainframe, the minicomputer and the microcomputer. These all have one thing in common: they operate quickly and accurately in solving problems.
(N. Mullen & P. Brown: English for Computer Science p. 21)
Exercise 1- A
machines computers computers input computers hardware programs
the mainframes, the minicomputer, and the microcomputer
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
29
VU
9- they do
Exercise 2
Fill in the gaps by using the correct connectives from the word bank.
but ,however, because, so for, this reason, therefore
Floppies are very cheap, ; they are slow and have a limited capacity. Hard disks are fast and can store large amounts of data they are fixed inside the computer, you cannot use them to transfer data. You can transfer data with removable hard disks, they are expensive. CD- ROM disks can hold quite large amounts of data. they are usually read only you cannot change the information on them. Magneto-optical disks are like CD-ROMs you can write data on to them. They are removable and have large capacities, they are expensive and do not conform to a standard. they are not very common. Magnetic tape is cheap and has a large capacity. it does not allow random access and drives are slow.
it is only suitable for backups.
(Glendenning & McEwan Basic English for Computer Science Page 36)
What Are Computers
Computers are the electronic machines that process information. They are capable of communicating with the user, of doing different kinds of arithmetic operations and of making three kinds of decisions. However, they are incapable of thinking. They accept data and instructions as input, and after processing it they output the results.
When talking about computers, both hardware and software need to be considered. The former refers to the actual machinery, whereas the latter refers to the programs which control and coordinate the activities of the hardware while processing the data.
The first computer was built in 1930 but since then computer technology has evolved a great deal. There are three different kinds of computers in use today: the mainframe, the minicomputer and the microcomputer. These all have one thing in common: they operate quickly and accurately in solving problems.
Recap:
Recognizing reference, connectives/ transitional words improves reading speed and comprehension.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
30
VU
Lesson -06 Reading Skills
This lesson will follow the pattern established by us in the earlier lessons. We will read a text to help us in comprehension, and then we will do exercises based on that text.
When you read the following text, you will probably meet words and expression that are new to you. First try to understand their meaning from the context - read the same passage a few times. When you have read the whole text, check new words in a dictionary. Those words in bold typeface are explained in the Glossary at the end of your reading package.
History of Computers
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
31
1.
3.
VU
Fourth-generation computers have now arrived, and the integrated circuits that are being developed have been greatly reduced in size. This is due to microminiaturization, which means that the circuits now fit onto a single chip. A chip is a square or rectangular piece of silicon, usually from 1/10 to 1/4 inch, upon which several layers of an integrated circuit are etched or imprinted, after which the circuit is encapsulated in plastic, ceramic or metal. Fourth generation computers are 50 times faster than third-generation computers and can complete approximately 1,000,000 instructions per second.
EXERCISES:
Which statement best expresses the main idea of the text? Why did you eliminate the other choices?
Answer:
Main Idea: 1 and 3. Choice 2 is a prediction not a fact. It is not the main point in the description of the history of computers.
Decide whether the following statements are true or false (T/F) by referring to the information given in the text. Then make the necessary changes so that the false statements become true.
T F
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
32
VU
3.
4.
6.
computers.
increased.
Answers:
3. Locating Information:
Find the passages in the text where the following ideas are expressed. Give the line references.
……..1.
During the same period of history, logarithm tables and calculus were developed.
It wasn’t until the 19th century that a calculating machine was invented which tried to reduce manpower.
Integrated circuitry has changed the computers further. People used their fingers to count.
The computers of the future may be quite different from those in use today.
……..2.
……..3.
……..4.
……..5.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
33
VU
……..6.
……..7.
Today’s computer circuits can be put on a chip.
Then an instrument with beads was invented for counting before a mechanical way for multiplying and dividing was devised.
……..8.
Transistors replaced vacuum tubes.
Answers:
4. Understanding Words
Refer back to the text and find synonyms (i.e. words with a similar meaning) for the following words.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
machine designed a lot errors solve
(I. 2) ………………………
(I. 9) ………………………
(I. 16) ………………………
(I. 17) ………………………
(I. 30) ………………………
Answers:
Refer back to the text and find synonyms (i.e. words with a similar meaning) for the following words.
Now refer back to the text and find antonyms (i.e. words with an opposite meaning) for the following words.
(p 2) ………………… (p-3) ………………… (p-3) …………………..
(p-5) …………………..
(p-6) ………………….
Answers:
Now refer back to the text and find antonyms (i.e. words with an opposite meaning) for the following words.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
34
VU
5a. Content Review:
Match the words in column A with the statements in column B.
A
B
4. digital computer
7. chip
f. Invented by Americans in
1944
8. microminiaturization
j. a branch of mathematics
Answers:
5b. Content Review
Use the information in the text on ‘History of Computers’ to complete the following table.
TIME EVENT
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
35
VU
Primitive Times
Abacus invented
17th and 18th centuries
Henry Briggs produced Logarithm tables
1930
Charles Babbage designed
1947
First use of in
New
Future Second-generation computers using
6. Focus Review:
New look back at the text ‘History of Computers’ and find out what the words in bold typeface refer to.
Answers:
Now look back at the text ‘History of Computers’ and find out what the words in italics refer to.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
36
VU
Lesson -07
Word Formation
When you are reading, you will come across unfamiliar words. It is often possible to guess the meanings of these words if you understand the way words are generally formed in English. Learning the use and meaning of words in English can be made easier, and even enjoyable, if you understand something about the way in which many English words are formed.
An English word can be divided into three parts:
Prefix
Pre-means ‘before’ and therefore, is what comes before the stem.
Example
Consider as an example, the prefix de-(meaning ‘reduce’ or ‘reverse’) in a word like demagnetize (‘to deprive of magnetism’).
Suffix
A suffix is what is attached to the end of the stem.
Example
Consider as an example the suffix -er (meaning (‘someone who’) in programmer (‘the person who programs’).
Both prefixes and suffixes are referred to as affixes.
Stem
The stem of a word is its basic form, the fundamental element which is common to all the other forms of the word. A prefix is a form which is fixed to the beginning of a stem; a suffix is a form which is fixed to the end of a stem.
Example
Stem = measure Suffix= measurable Prefix =immeasurable
A prefix usually changes the meaning of a word while a suffix usually changes its part of speech. E.g. the suffix -able changes verbs into adjectives (breakable, enjoyable). The prefix im- changes the meaning to the opposite: measurable means capable of being measured; immeasurable means “not capable of being measured.”
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
37
VU
By learning only a few prefixes and suffixes, you will be able to recognise or guess the meaning of hundreds of English words.
The English language makes frequent use of this method of word formation. Notice the numerous words formed on the stem act.
Prefix+ act | act+ suffix | prefix+ act +suffix |
re+act | act+ion | re+act+ion |
enact | active | enactment |
reenact | actively | reenactment |
interact | actionless | reactor |
transact | actable | reactive |
| activity | reactivate |
| activate | reactivation |
| activation | interaction |
| actor | transaction |
| actress | inactive |
| | inaction |
AFFIXES
SUFFIXES
PREFIXES (STEM)
Both prefixes and suffixes are referred to as Affixes
Suffixes and their meanings :
Let us now consider some suffixes and their usual meanings.
Suffixes
Nouns | Verbs | Adjectives | Adverb |
-ance | -ize | -able | -ly |
-ence | -ate | -ible | |
-or | -fy | -less | |
-er | -en | -ic | |
-ist | -ify | -ical | |
-ness | | -ish | |
Study these tables and try to find additional examples. Use your dictionary if necessary.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
38
VU
Noun-forming suffixes:
Suffix | Meaning | Examples |
-ance | state | performance |
ence | quality of | independence |
-er, -or | a person who | programmer, operator |
| a thing which | compiler, accumulator |
-ation | the act of | execution |
-tion | | |
-ist | a person who | analyst, typist |
-yst | | |
-ness | condition of | cleanliness |
-ion | action/state | conversion |
-ing | activity | multiplexing |
-ment | state, action | measurement |
-ity | state, quality | electricity |
-ian | pertaining to | electrician |
-ism | condition/state | magnetism |
-dom | domain/condition | freedom |
-ship | condition/state | relationship, partnership |
-ary | | binary |
Verb-forming suffixes:
Suffix | Meaning | Examples |
-ize ate -fy -en | to make | computerize automate, activate, calculate simplify harden, widen |
Adverb-forming suffixes:
Suffix | Meaning | Examples |
-ly | in the manner of comparably, helpfully | electronically, logically |
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
39
VU
Adjective-forming suffixes:
Suffix | Meaning | Examples |
-al | | computational, logical |
-ar | have the quality of | circular |
-ic | | magnetic, automatic |
-ical | | electrical |
-able | capable of being | comparable |
-ible | | divisible |
-ous | like, full of | dangerous |
-ious | | religious |
-ful | characterized by | helpful |
-less | without | careless |
-ish | like | yellowish |
-ed | having | computed, punched |
-ive | quality of | interactive |
-ing | to make or do | programming, coding |
Locating Base Words | | processing, multiplexing |
It is sometimes difficult to locate base word, because their spellings frequently change when suffixes are added to them.
Exercise1
Locate the base words in the boldface words and write them on the given lines.
We enjoy the athletic games at --------------.
If you ----------- our luck with that of others, our luck was good.
His knowledge of China is not based on actual ------------------------?
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
40
VU
They have attitudes of those who -------.
Who engaged in the -----------?
Exercise 2
Read the following sentences and underline all the suffixes. Then try to find out what parts of speech the words are.
3.
4.
The new microcomputer we purchased does not have a Fortran compiler. It is programmable in Basic only.
A computer is a machine with an intricate network of electronic circuits that operate
switches or magnetize tiny metal cores.
5. In very large and modern installations, the computer operator sits in front of a screen that shows an up-to-date summary of the computer jobs as they are being processed.
The introduction of terminals and screens has partly replaced the use of punched
6.
cards.
optical link.
Exercise 3
Fill in each blank with the appropriate form of the words.
1. operation, operate, operator, operational, operationally, operating
operator.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
41
VU
2.
a.
b.
acceptance, accept, accepted, acceptable, acceptably
A computer is a device which accepts processes and gives out information. The students are still waiting for their acceptance into the Computer Sciences program.
It is acceptable to work without a template if the flowcharts are not kept on the file.
c.
3.
a.
b.
c.
solution, solve, solvable, solver
It may take a lot of time to find a solution to a complex problem in programming. A computer can solve a problem faster than any human being.
A computer has often been referred to as a problem solver.
5. communication, communicate, communicable, communicative, communicably
6. calculation, calculate, calculating, calculated, calculator, calculable, calculus
calculating machine.
7.
mechanic, mechanism, mechanize, mechanical, mechanically, mechanistic, mechanics, mechanization, mechanized
Today’s computers are less mechanized than they used.
The mechanical devices in a computer system operate more slowly than the electromagnetic devices.
The mechanism of the brain is very complicated but unlike a computer it isn’t
mechanical.
a.
b.
c.
8.
a.
b.
c.
necessity, necessitate, necessary, necessarily, necessities, need, needed
Because it is expensive to set up a computer department it is necessary to budge well for the basic necessities of the installations.
A good programmer isn’t necessarily going to be a good systems analyst.
Students’ lack of understanding of the basic concepts in computer science may
necessitate the instructor to restructure the course.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
42
VU
9.
dependence, depend on, dependable, dependably, dependent, dependency, depending
the complexity of the problem and his ability and experience.
Let us recap:
An English word can be divided into three parts: a prefix, a stem and a suffix. Prefix is what comes before the stem. A suffix is what is attached to the end of the stem. A stem is the root of the word. Both prefixes and suffixes are referred to as Affixes.n Esh word can be divided into three parts:
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
43
VU
Lesson -08
Word Formation- Prefixes
We have already learned how words can be formed by looking at suffixes. In this lesson, we will look at some other ways, beginning with prefixes and stem words, followed by synonyms and antonyms as a means of enhancing your vocabulary.
A prefix is a letter or group of letters that is added to the beginning of a stem/ base word
e.g. in untrue the prefix is un- and the stem/base word is true. Words that are unfamiliar to you may sometimes consist of a stem word you know and an added prefix, for instance: We were shocked to learn of the illimitability of the dictator’s power.
Illimitability is a word that does not often appear in print. It may be unfamiliar to you. However, you can locate its stem word, limit, which means ‘to restrict’. If you also know that the prefix il- (as in illegal) means ‘not’, you should be able to determine that illimitability refers to which has no limits or restriction. The sentence means ‘we were shocked to learn that there is no limit to the dictator's power.
Now you will look at a list of words in which adapt is the stem/ base word. If this word is preceded by a prefix you can make twenty -four additional words.
Ptation | nonadaptational | readaptation |
pted | nonadaptive | readaptive |
ptive | nonadapter | readaptiveness |
ptation | preadapt | unadaptable |
ptability | preadaptable | unadaptableness |
ptable | preadaptation | unadaptive |
ptation | readaptable | unadaptiveness |
pting | readaptability | unadaptively |
7 Prefix | Meaning | Example |
1. un- | not; no | unhappy means not happy |
2. non- | not; no | nonliving means not living |
3. dis- | not; no | to distrust is not to trust |
4. in- | not; no | indirect means not direct |
5. Im- | Not; no | imperfect means not perfect |
6. Ir- | not; no | irrational means not rational |
| not; no not; without | illegal means not legal atypical means not typical |
9. pre- | before | prewar means before a war |
10. post- | after | postwar means after a war |
11. anti- | oppos(ing) | antiwar means opposing war |
12. pro- | favour(ing) | prowar means favoring war |
13. inter- | between | interstate means between states |
14. hyper- | excessive(ly) | hyperactive mean excessively active |
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
44
VU
15. mal- | bad(ly) | malnutrition is bad nutrition |
16. mis- | incorrect(ly) | to misspell is to spell incorrectly |
17. pseudo- | false (ly) | a pseudoscience is a false science |
18. semi- | partly | semipublic means partly |
Defining Words with Prefixes
Make sentences by writing the base/stem words and the meanings of the prefixes in the boldface words on the lines provided.
They are people.
There is to outer space.
We took a flight .
They could the damage to the house.
Did he to marriage? 14
It is a .
The patient is .
Some thoughts one can . 15
If you know that adapt means ‘to make suitable’ and you also know the meanings of the prefixes mal-, non-, pre-, re-, and un- you know the essential meanings of these twenty four words, even if you have not seen them in the print before. You will now look at nineteen prefixes and by understanding the most useful meanings of these common English prefixes you will increase your vocabulary by hundreds or even thousands of words in a very short time.
Word Formation - Prefixes
Let us now consider some more prefixes, their usual meanings, and how they change the meanings of English words. These prefixes will make words related to computers.
PREFIXES
NEGATIVE/ SIZE LOCATION TIME AND NUMBER
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
45
VU
POSITIVE | | | ORDER | |
un- | semi- | inter- | pre- | mono- |
non- | mini- | super- | ante- | bi- |
in- | micro- | trans- | fore- | hex- |
dis- | | ex- | post- | oct- |
re- | | extra- | | multi- |
| | mid- | | |
Study these tables and try to find additional examples. Use your dictionary if necessary.
Negative and positive prefixes
PREFIX MEANING
EXAMPLES
un- | | unmagnetized, unpunched |
im- | not good enough | impossible |
il- | | illegal |
non- | not connected with | non-programmable, non-impact |
mis- | bad, wrong | mispronounce |
dis- | opposite feeling | disagree |
| opposite action | disconnect |
anti- | against | antisocial |
de- | reduce, reverse | demagnetize, decode |
under- | too little | underestimate |
Positive prefixes
re- | do again | reorganize |
over- | too much | overheat |
Prefixes of Size
PREFIX | MEANING | EXAMPLES |
semi- | half, partly | semiconductor |
equi- | equal | equidistant |
maxi- | big | maxicomputer |
micro- | small | microcomputer |
mini- | little | minicomputer |
macro- | large | macroeconomics |
mega- | megabyte | |
Prefixes of Location
PREFIX
MEANING
EXAMPLES
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
46
VU
PREFIX | MEANING | EXAMPLES |
pro- | for | program |
auto- | self | automatic |
co- | together | coordinate |
neo- | new | neoclassical |
pan- | all | pan-Islamic |
Exercise 2 | | |
inter- | between/among, | interface, interactive |
super- | over | supersonic |
trans | across | transmit, transfer |
ex- | out | exclude, extrinsic |
extra- | beyond | extraordinary |
sub- | under | subschema |
infra- | below | infra-red |
peri- | around | peripheral |
Prefixes of Time and Order
PREFIX MEANING
EXAMPLES
ante- | before | antecedent |
pre- | | prefix |
prime- | first | primary, primitive |
post- | after | postdated |
retro- | backward | retroactive |
Prefixes of Numbers
PREFIX MEANING
EXAMPLES
semi- | half | semicircle |
mono- | one | monochromatic |
bi- | two | binary |
tri- | three | triangle |
quad- | four | quadruple |
penta- | five | pentagon |
hex- | six | hexadecimal |
septem- | seven | september |
oct- | eight | octal |
dec- | ten | decimal |
multi- | many | multiprogramming, multiplexor |
Other Prefixes
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
47
VU
Read the following sentences and underline all the prefixes. Then try to find out what the prefixes mean by referring back to the tables you have just completed.
33
Exercise 3
Fill in the blanks with the correct prefix from the following list. Use the glossary at the end of the reading package.
multi deci- sub- inter semi- mono- mega- auto mini- de- inter- prim –
3 Exercise4
Exercise 4
Read the following paragraph and underline the prefixes then complete the table that follows it.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
48
VU
Computers may have a short history but prior to their development, there were many other ways of doing calculations. These calculations were done using devices that are still used today; the slide rule being a perfect example, not to mention the ten fingers of the hands. These machines, unlike computers, were not electronic and were replaced by faster calculating devices. It wasn’t until the mid-1940s that the first digital computer was built. The post-war industrial boom saw the development of computers take shape.
By the 1960s, computers were faster than their predecessors and semiconductors had replaced vacuum tubes by tiny integrated circuit boards. Due to microminiaturization in the 1970s, these circuits were etched onto wafer thin rectangular pieces of silicon. This integrated circuitry is known as a chip and is used in microcomputers of all kinds. It has been forecasted, by the end of this decade, exceptionally faster and smaller computers will replace those in use today.
and complete the table
Exercise 5: Review of Suffixes
Read the following paragraph and underline the suffixes.
A computer can solve a series of problems and make hundreds, even thousands, of logical decisions without becoming tired or bored. It can find the solution of a problem in a fraction of time than it takes a human being to do the job. A computer can replace people in dull, routine tasks, but it has no originality; it works according to the instructions given to it and cannot exercise any valuable judgment. There are times when a computer seems to operate like a mechanical ‘brain’, but its achievements are limited by the minds of human beings. A computer cannot do anything unless a person tells it what to do and gives it the appropriate information; but as electric pulses can move at the speed of light, a computer can carry out vast numbers of arithmetic-logical operations almost instantaneously. A person can do everything a computer can do, but in many cases that person would be dead long before the job was finished.beings. A computer cannot do anything unless
Having dealt with the roots of words and how suffixes and prefixes work, let us look at another way of enhancing your vocabulary:
Synonyms are words that have the same or nearly the same meaning. For example, big large, huge, enormous monumental, gigantic, immense, and colossal are synonyms. Synonyms have two characteristics that you must understand in order to use them appropriately.
First Characteristic:
Most synonyms have similar meanings in only one of their senses.e.g appropriate and apt are synonyms when they are used to indicate that something is ‘fit’ for a specific purpose. He made an appropriate remark
He made an apt remark
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
49
VU
Appropriate and apt may be used interchangeably to mean “fit” but they have other meanings that they do not share. For instance apt may mean “likely”, but appropriate does not have this meaning.
When he is nervous he is apt to laugh.
Here appropriate may not be used interchangeably with apt.
Second Characteristic:
Synonyms often have shades of meaning in addition to the meaning they share.
For instance blame and denounce are synonyms that refer to the act of making an unfavourable judgement. However, to blame is to fix the responsibility for an error whereas to denounce is to state intense disapproval in public. If you receive a letter in your letterbox that should have been delivered to a neighbour, you may blame your postman, but you are not likely to publicly denounce the postal employee for such a trivial mistake.
On the other hand, if elected officials are found guilty of stealing taxpayers’ money, they are denounced; they are severely criticised in public, and in some cases thrown out of the office.
Blame does not convey the kind of unfavourable judgement that elected officials receive when they betray the trust of those who elected them.
Final Mastery
Selecting Word Meanings
In each of the following groups, encircle the word or expression that is most nearly the same in meaning as the word in boldface type in the introductory phrase.
a. dress b. teach c. praise d. warn
a. discover b. wipe out c. hide d. apologize for
a. old-fashioned b. recent c. temporary d. enduring
a. torture b. release
c. kill
d. defeat 56
5. Dissolute behavior | | ||
a. unsuccessful | b. stylish | c. immoral | d. modest |
6. Jeer at our efforts | | | |
a. examine | b. reject | c. criticize | d . ridicule |
7. A firm adherent | | | |
a. enemy | b. outside | c. supporter | d. student |
8. A semblance of order | |||
a. appearance | b. lack | c. result | d. opposite |
9. An irate guest | | | |
a. sociable | b. welcome | c. talkative | d. angry |
10. A brief altercation | |||
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
50
VU
a. shower b. argument
c. relief
d. statement
11. An intrepid camper
b. strong
a. tireless
12. Revile the driver
a. adore
c.fearless
d. skilled
b. train
c. pay
d. abuse
13. Made a trite remark
a. stale b. witty
c. original
d. in bad taste
14. Rectify an impression
a. explain b. make
c. correct
d. confirm
15. Daunted by their treats
a. encouraged | b. ridiculed | c. destroyed | d. intimidated |
16. A child’s prattle | | | |
a. clothing | b. outlook | c. play | d. talk |
17. brazen conduct | | | |
a. shameless | b. modest | c. deadly | d. acceptable |
18. a major exodus | | | |
a. entrance | b. discussion | c. departure | d. battle |
19. an impoverished neighbor | |||
a. learned | b. poor | c. beloved | d. unfriendly |
20. a lucid explanation | | | |
a. clear | b. inadequate | c. learned | d. foolish |
Recap: | | | |
We have dealt with Vocabulary Building in this lesson by focussing on Affixes and Suffixes.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
51
VU
Lesson -09
Dear SteReading: Description, Locating Information
In this lesson we will read a text and then solve exercises based on that text. These exercises will again emphasize and improve your reading comprehension abilities.
Characteristics
When you read the following text, remember to try and understand the meaning of new words and expressions from the context. Don’t check new words in the dictionary until you have read the whole text. Those words in bold typeface are explained in the Glossary at the end of the book.om the context. Don’t check new words in the
For example, in clothing manufacturing, the input is the pieces of cut cloth, the processing is the sewing together of these pieces, and the output is the finished garment.
INPUT
COMPUTER
OUTPUT
STORAGE
[3] Figure 3.1 shows schematically the fundamental hardware components in a computer system. The centerpiece is called either the computer, the processor, or, usually, the central processing unit (CPU). The term ‘computer’ includes those parts of hardware in which calculations and other data manipulations are performed, and the high-speed internal memory in which data and calculations are stored during actual execution of programs. Attached to the CPU are the various peripheral devices such as card readers and keyboards (two common examples of input devices). When data or programs need to be saved for long period of time, they are stored on various secondary memory devices or storage devices such as magnetic tapes or magnetic disks.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
52
VU
Exercises
1: Main Idea
Which statement or statements best express the main idea of the text? Why did you eliminate the other choices?
2: Understanding the Passage:
Decide whether the following statements are true or false (T/F) by referring to the information given in the text. Then, make the necessary changes so that the false statements become true.
T F
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
53
VU
3: Locating Information:
Find the passages in the text where the following ideas are expressed. Give the paragraph reference.
………. 1. All computers are basically the same.
………. 2. Then arithmetic and / or decision-making operations are performed.
………. 3. Computers are limited by man’s imagination more than anything else.
………. 4. All the equipment used in a computer system is hardware.
………. 5. Computers are electronic machines used for processing data.
………. 6. If programs or data need to be kept for a long time, they are stored on tapes or disks.
………. 7. First the computer accepts data.
……….8. Finally, new information is presented to the user.
4: Contextual Reference:
Look back at the text and find out what the words in bold typeface refer to.
(para.1)……… (para.1)……… (para.2)……… (para.3)……… (para.4)……… (para.4)……… (para.4)……… (para.5)……… (para.5)……… (para.6)………
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
54
VU
5: Understanding Words:
Refer back to the text and find synonyms (i.e. words with a similar meaning) for the following words.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
called tremendous ideas
react
take away
(para.1)……… (para.1)……… (para.2)……… (para.4)……… (para.6)………
Now refer back to the text and find antonyms (i.e. words with an opposite meaning) for the following words.
taken away wide limited immovable
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. after
(para.2)……… (para.4)……… (para.4)……… (para.5)……….
(para.6)……….
6: Word Forms:
First choose the appropriate form of the words to complete the following sentences. Then check the difference of meaning in your dictionary.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
55
VU
7a: Content Review
Try to think of a definition for each of these items before checking them in the Glossary. Then complete the following statements with the appropriate words. (some words can be used more than once.) Make sure you use the correct form, i.e. singular or plural.
processing, hardware, magnetic tape, input, processor, magnetic disk, output, secondary memory, personnel, single-purpose
41
4. A computer isn’t usually a ……. machine and may require quite specialized …….. to operate it and all its related equipment.
42
7b: Content Review
Summarize the text on ‘characteristics’ by completing the following table.
SYSTEM COMPONENTS PARTS
Hardware
1.
2. Control Unit 3.
1.
Peripheral devices A.
2. Disks 3.
4.
5.
6.
B. others
Organizing Information
A paragraph is a group of related sentences that develop an idea. In nearly every paragraph, there is one idea that is more important than others. This idea is called the main idea of the paragraph and is usually found at the beginning of the paragraph.
Sample Paragraph 1
All computers, whether large or small, have the same basic capabilities. They have circuits for performing arithmetic operations. They all have a way of communicating with the person(s) using them. They also have circuits for making decisions. 44
In this sample paragraph 1, the first sentence, ‘All computers, whether large or small, have the same basic capabilities’ expresses the main idea of the paragraph.
All main idea sentences have a topic and say something about the topic.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
56
VU
Example
All computers, [topic] whether large or small, have the same basic capabilities.
[about the topic] 45
In some of your reading, finding main ideas may serve your needs but in much of your studying you need to grasp details. It is sometimes more difficult to grasp and understand details than main ideas. You will find it helpful if you think of details as growing out of the main idea. In sample paragraph 1, there are three major details growing out of the main idea. These are the major details:
46
A major detail often has minor details growing out of it. These minor details tell more about a major detail, just as major details tell more about a main idea. In studying, you often find a paragraph that has many small details that you must grasp and remember. Breaking up a paragraph of this kind into its three components; the main idea, major details and minor details will help you to understand and remember what it is about.
Sample Paragraph 2
It is the incredible speed of computers along with their memory capacity that make them so useful and valuable. Computers can solve problems in a fraction of time. For this reason, they are used in business to keep the record of accounts and airlines, train lines and bus lines use them to keep track of ticket sales. As for memory, modern computers can store information with high accuracy and reliability. A computer can put data into its ‘memory’ and retrieve it in a few millionths of a second. It also has a storage capacity for as many as a million items.
If you were to organize this paragraph into its three components, it would look like this: 48
Main idea: It is the incredible speed of computers along with their memory capacity that make them so useful and valuable
Major details: a. Computers can solve problems in a fraction of time
b. As for memory, modern computers can store information with high accuracy and reliability
Minor Details: a. Computers are used in business to keep their accounts.
b. Airlines train lines bus lines use them to keep track of ticket sales
c.A computer can put data into its memory and can retrieve it in a few millionths of a second.
d. it also has a storage capacity for as many as a million items. 49
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
57
VU
N.B. The major details in a paragraph are of equal importance. Because minor details grow out of major details and also give information about major details, they are less important. In making a block diagram you don’t have to write every word of the main idea sentence.
Exercise 1
Read the following paragraph and try to find the main idea, major details and minor details.
The computer has changed the production of copy in the newspaper industry. There are three steps involved in the process: input, correction and output. First, the computer numbers each story, counts words and gives a listing of the length of each story. Then a page is made up, advertisements are placed in, the copy is shifted or deleted and corrections are made. Finally, the computer hyphenates words and the result of all this is a newspaper page.
Main idea: The computer has changed the production of copy in the newspaper industry. Major details:
Minor details:
52
Exercise 2
After reading the following paragraph, practice to find the main idea, major details and minor details.
Railways use large computer systems to control ticket reservations and to give immediate information on the status of its trains. The computer system is connected, by private telephone lines, to terminals in major train stations and ticket reservations for customers are made through these. The passenger’s name, type of accommodation and the train schedule is put into the computer’s memory.
53
On a typical day, a railway’s computer system gets thousands of telephone calls about reservations, space on other railways, and requests for arrivals and departures. A big advantage of the railway computer ticket reservation system is its rapidity because a cancelled booking can be sold anywhere in the system just a few seconds later. Railway computer systems are not used for reservations alone. They are used for a variety of other jobs including train schedules, planning, freight and cargo loading, meal planning, personnel availability, accounting and stock control.
54
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
58
VU
Main idea:
Major details: Terminals for ticket reservations
Minor details: Thousands of calls for reservations space, arrivals and departures.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
59
VU
Lesson -10
Reading: Word Forms Mainframes:
Large computer systems, or mainframes, as they are referred to in the field of computer science, are those computer systems found in computer installations processing immense amounts of data. These powerful computers make use of very high-speed main memories into which data and programs to be dealt with are transferred for rapid access. These powerful machines have a larger repertoire of more complex instructions which can be executed more quickly. Whereas smaller computers may take several steps to perform a particular operation, a larger machine may accomplish the same thing with one instruction.
These computers can be of two types: digital or analog. The digital computer or general- purpose computer as it is often known makes up about 90 percent of the large computers now in use. It gets its name because the data that are presented to it are made up of a code consisting of digits–single-character numbers. The digital computer is like a gigantic cash register in that it can do calculations in steps, one after another at tremendous speed and with great accuracy.
Digital computer programming is by far the most commonly used in electronic data processing for business or statistical purposes. The analog computer works something like a car speedometer, in that it continuously works out calculations. It is used essentially for problems involving measurements. It can simulate, or imitate different measurements by electronic means. Both of these computer types – the digital and the analog – are made up of electronic components that may require a large room to accommodate them. At present, the digital computer is capable of doing anything the analog once did. Moreover, it is easier to program and cheaper to operate. A new type of scientific computer system called the hybrid computer has now been produced that combines the two types into one.
Really powerful computers continue to be bulky and require special provision for their housing, refrigeration systems, air filtration and power supplies. This is because much more space is taken up by the input/output devices – the magnetic tape and disk units and other peripheral equipment – than by the electronic components that do no make up the bulk of the machine in a powerful installation. The power consumption of these machines is also quite high, not to mention the price that runs into thousands of dollars.
The future will bring great developments in the mechanical devices associated with computer systems. For a long time these have been the weak link from the point of view of both efficiency and reliability.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
60
VU
Exercises :
Which statement best expresses the main idea of the text? Why did you eliminate the other choices?
Answer:
1. Main idea
Which statement best expresses the main idea of the text? Why did you eliminate the other choices?
Decided whether the following statements are true or false (T/F) by referring to the information in the text. Then make the necessary changes so that the false statements become true.
T F
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
61
VU
Answers:
Decided whether the following sentences are true or false (T/F) by referring to the information in the text. Then make the necessary changes so that the false statements become true.
They will be great developments in computer technology in the future
3. Locating information :
Find the passages in the text where the following ideas are expressed. Give the line references.
………. 1.
………..2.
Smaller computers may take longer to perform an operation.
More technological development is necessary in the mechanical devices associated with computer systems.
Mainframes can operate quickly and execute more complex instruments. The hybrid computer is a combination of both digital and analog computers. Digital computers are used more than analog computers.
Mainframes are large powerful computers.
………..3.
….…….4.
….……5.
….…….6.
….…….7.
An analog computer is comparable to a car speedometer in the way it operates.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
62
VU
.……….8.
Digital computers do calculations, one after another, quickly and exactly.
Answers:
Find the passages in the text where the following ideas expressed. Give the paragraph references.
Para1 1. Smaller computers may take longer to perform an operation.
Para3 2. More technological development is necessary in the mechanical devices associated with computer systems.
Para1 3. Mainframes can operate quickly and execute more complex instruments. Para2 4. The hybrid computer is a combination of both digital and analog computers. Para2 5. Digital computers are used more than analog computers.
Para1 6. Mainframes are large powerful computers.
Para2 7. An analog computer is comparable to a car speedometer in the way it operates.
Para2 8. Digital computers do calculations, one after another, quickly and exactly.
4. Contextual reference :
Look back at the text and find out what the words in bold typeface refer to.
(line.7) ……………. (line.12)…………… (line.14)…………… (line.16)…………… (line.20)…………...
(line.23)…………...
(line.24)…………...
(line.29)…………... (line.31)…………… (line.37)…………….
Answers:
Look back at the text and find out what the words in bold typeface refer to.
……….
……………
(p.1) instructions
(p.2) General-purpose computer
(p.2) data
4. in that it can do calculations
(p.2) digital computer
…………...
…………...
(p.2) analog computer
(p.2) digital & analog
(p.2) electronic components
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
VU
theirhousing
63
(p.2)Hybrid computer
(p.3)computer (p.3)price
5. Understanding words
Refer back to the text and find synonyms for the following words.
(l. 2) ……………………..
(l. 7) ……………………..
(l. 9) ……………………. (l.15)……………………. (l. 21) ……………………
Answers:
Refer back to the text and find synonyms for the following words.
(p.1) …field…………. (p.1) …executed…….. (p.1) …accomplished… (p.2)…..consisting of … (p.2) ….essentially……
Now refer back to the text and find antonyms for the following words.
(l. 5) ……………………..
(l. 12) ……………………
6.ignored 7.seldom 8.little 9.small 10.weak
(l. 16) …………………… (l. 30)…………………
(l. 35) ……………………
Answers:
Now refer back to the text and find antonyms for the following words.
(p.1) ……deal with……… (p.2) ……often………….. (p.2) ……gigantic………. (p.3)…… bulky…………. (p.3) ……powerful……..
6. Words forms:
First choose the appropriate form of the words to complete the sentences. Then check the differences of meaning in your dictionary.
1. permission, permit, permissible, permitted
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
64
VU
Answers:
First choose the appropriate form of the words to complete the sentences. Then check the differences of meaning in your dictionary.
Answers:
continuation, continue, continuing, continuously
Answers:
measurement, measure, measured, measurable
…measurement………
4. association, associate, associated
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
65
VU
Answers:
Answers:
. There are many com……………. a7. Content review:
Complete the following statements with the appropriate words. (Some can be used more than once.) Make sure you use the correct form, i.e. singular or plural.
mainframe | computer installation | digits |
hybrid computer | code | programming |
Digital | analog | |
1. The …………. system is a computer which has combined the features of both the
…….…… and ……….. computer. It is used mainly in scientific research. 2.……………computers get their name form the word……………These are single character numbers that make up the …………. in which the data are presented to the computer for processing.
……………
Answers
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
66
VU
Lesson -11
Reading: Understanding Reading
Reading is the most important skill you will need for success in your studies. Poor reading may be a problem for many of you, but it is not a hopeless one. We have been learning ways in which you can improve your reading comprehension. Remember, this will only be an introduction. You must continue to read and practice on your own. You learn to read by reading.
Our main concern is improving your comprehension. There is a relationship between reading speed and reading comprehension. You may think that if you read rapidly, your comprehension will suffer. This is a false assumption. As you push yourself to read slower you may find that you comprehend less.
One cause of slow reading is VOCALIZATION - the forming of the sounds of each word even though you may not say them aloud. Vocalization is very common among our students. It is a sure sign that the reader is a poor reader. So, learn to read with your eyes and mind and not with your lips. In simple words learn to read silently.
If you learn to recognize and understand the principles and methods of writing - rhetoric - it will help improve your reading. If you learn to understand why a piece of text or writing was written, what it says, both in overall statement and major sub points, and how the author or writer has made those major statements and the minor sub parts fit in, it will help improve your understanding of the reading text.
All successful writers work along these lines. The way they write will provide answers to the three questions - Why? What? And How?
An important part of reading is realizing that everything you read has an author or writer who has something to say, and he says it in a particular way or manner. You, as a successful reader, must apply the same technique that the writer used - the questions, why? What? How? And decode what he has said.
To answer the first question - Why? - remember the author is a person who has a reason for writing a given piece of text, and who works from a personal point of view. As a skilled reader you must fully understand and evaluate what you read. The writer has a purpose in writing. You must recognize that PURPOSE. Aligned with purpose are two other things which are known as ATTITUDE and TONE - the expression of the writer’s feelings.
There are 3 common purposes of communication: to inform, to persuade and to entertain. When the purpose is to inform, the writer gives information on facts about the topic or subject he is writing about. When the purpose is to persuade, the aim is to convince the
reader to agree with the writer’s point of view. Here, also writers may give facts but their
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
67
VU
main goal is to promote an opinion. For the third purpose which is to entertain, the author appeals to the reader’s senses and imagination with the aim of amusing and delight.
Closely related to the question of purpose is the matter of ATTITUDE. What is the writer’s attitude toward his purpose, and toward his subject, or toward you, the reader? Even if he is arguing, he can be arguing coolly and logically, or angrily and heatedly. He can see something funny in the situation or something frightening.
Similarly, he can approach his audience - the readers as friends, as enemies, as equals, or he can talk down to them from a position of authority. Attitude, then, is the author’s approach, position, the stance that he adopts towards the material he is presenting, the audience i.e. you, the reader and the situation in which he is writing.
A good clue to the author’s attitude and approach to the subject is his TONE. This is the voice in which he is speaking to you - the language, the words and phrases he chooses to write. It is through the author’s tone that we sense his wit, humor, sadness, indignation, friendliness etc.
Just as a speaker’s voice can project a range of feelings, a writer’s words and phrases can project one or more tones or feelings. Understanding tone is an important part of understanding what the writer has written. Sometimes, tone is evident from the first line, from the first paragraph. Sometimes, the tone, purpose and attitude will not be evident or clear to you until the entire piece or text has been read.
Authors and their works are complex. An author may use different types of writing to put forward his views. He may narrate, describe, explain or argue. Not all writing fits neatly into one of these categories. He may combine all these types in one piece of writing. Description and narration are often used to help developing a further purpose – either Exposition or Argument.
Or he may use exposition to develop an argument. Thus, you may find combinations of purpose involved in what you read. The same approach can apply to humor and entertainment. If you can find out what is the underlying purpose and intention of the author, and what technique or strategy he is employing, then you are a successful reader.
All this might not be evident in your first reading. So, this means you will have to re-read. At least, this might be necessary till you are a practiced reader. You cannot always rely on your first reading to bring you the comprehension, the analytical understanding. But the clues that your first reading will supply will then be valuable in your re-reading.
The second technique that the writer uses - the WHAT question. What the writer says in the overall statement and major sub points of the text leads us to the author’s basic
statement - his thesis statement about his subject. For you, the reader, the thesis also indicates what the writer is NOT saying. It shows you the limitations the writer has set for
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
68
VU
himself, how much of the general subject he is going to deal with. A good reader makes sure that he reads within the boundaries of those limitations.
To help readers understand their main points, authors try to present supporting details in a clearly organized way. Details might be arranged in any of several common patterns. Sometimes, authors may build a paragraph or longer passage exclusively on one pattern; very often the patterns are mixed. By recognizing the patterns, you, the reader, will be better able to understand and remember what you read.
The most commonly used patterns of organization or subdivisions are time order / sequences. List of items, comparison or contrast, cause and effect, definition and example. These subdivisions complete the pattern of the writer’s basic statement, his thesis, his main thought.
The reader’s recognition and understanding of these subdivisions are a part of answering the question HOW - the third important technique used by the writer. Recognition of the main subdivisions is recognition of the techniques and devices of the organization.
Paragraphs and particularly, the topic sentences of paragraphs are important clues. The topics of the individual paragraphs are the core statements in explaining the thesis: each paragraph will make some kind of core statement and then develop it with some concrete details.
In short pieces of writing each paragraph may be a separate subdivision; in longer pieces, a number of paragraphs may form a subdivision, each contributing to the total understanding. Relationships between the parts are conveyed throughout a text by transitions. Recognition of these transitions - the movement from or connection between one part and the next will lead to a general improvement of your reading. In other words it means noticing important words and phrases which connect the parts. These may be function words or content words.
Function words are an important part of writing and reading and are used no matter what the subject of the text is. These are the small words such as in, at, and, but… the prepositions, the conjunctions, the modifiers, etc. They establish emphasis and relationships between the parts. They are the chief clues to the organization of a piece of writing.
Content words are those words that are central to the development of the subject of any particular piece of writing. They are often words that are most fully defined. But it is also possible that the author assumes you know their definitions. In either case you, the reader, have to be sure you understand these key words. Also you need to notice how an author modifies key content words at different parts of the text. He may use synonyms
i.e. use other words with similar meaning or he may use antonyms – words that are in contrast to the key content words.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
69
VU
The successful reader learns to recognize and understand the clues that the writer gives. This can only happen through practiced reading.
READING AND UNDERSTANDING
An Approach to Comprehension
You have probably realized by now that everything you learn in this course is geared towards the end of writing and understanding English and nothing is merely an exercise learnt for examination purposes. What we call ‘comprehension exercises’ are in fact a test of this understanding. Up till now, you have been dealing with computer related passages, now we will shift gear and make you look at other kinds of reading materials.
The pieces of writing we use will be of two varieties: imaginative and practical.
The ‘imaginative’ passage will be a piece of creative writing, an extract from a novel or a short story dealing with a fictional situation; it could alternatively be a poem.
Kinds of Questions: The kinds of questions on reading passages are likely to be as follows:
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
VU
is writing about, but the words he uses to describe that character and the situations he presents him in may convey the author’s attitude towards the character, and that attitude is passed on to the perceptive reader. The words are not chosen accidentally but with a purpose, and you must be able to get beyond the surface meaning of the words and see what the implications of such words are. For example:
70
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
71
VU
passage, but this time treating it from a personal point of view. For example, the passage may be about working conditions, and you may be asked, ‘Comment on the conditions under which you work, indicating the area in which you think improvements could be made.’
These are the main kinds of questions and approaches you are likely to be asked. There may be others, but if you become acquainted with these types of questions and texts and can understand them, you should be well prepared confident.
Listing
It is important when reading to recognize and understand the relationship in which sentences and groups of sentences combine to present information. This information may be linked by means of a connective word or marker. Making a list, enumerating, and giving instructions, indicates a cataloguing of what is being said. It is important to note that most enumerations belong to clearly defined sets. The following table is a list of the markers that can be used to show the order in which things are to be said.
LISTING MARKERS
1, 2, 3, etc.
One, two, three, etc. First(ly), second(ly), third(ly) In the first/second/third place Another, next, then
Furthermore, afterwards, moreover Lastly/finally
to begin/start with, and to conclude First and foremost mark the beginning
First and most important(ly) of a descending order Above all mark the end of
Last but not least an ascending order 42
There are many ways of showing sequential relationships. Those given in the table above are not the only ones, they are the most common ones used in listing or enumerating. The – ly forms are usually used when listing.
Sample Paragraph
More and more police departments have now sophisticated devices to help control the increasing crime rate. Some of these are: Firstly, a computer terminal inside a police vehicle to answer an officer’s questions; secondly, a computer-controlled display unit for displaying fingerprints; and thirdly, educational systems for police officers such as terminals, enabling them to verify changes in laws, rules and regulations. The computer memory of many law enforcement systems contains all kinds of information. First and foremost, it has data on stolen items such as cars, license plates and property. Second, it has information on missing persons and wanted fugitives. Last but not least, it contains information on political extremist groups and their activities. It goes without saying that computers have certainly revolutionized police work by providing access to millions of
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
72
VU
items of information with the least possible delay and speeding up the process of apprehending suspicious-looking characters.
Exercise 1
The following paragraph is an excerpt from a passage you have read earlier. ‘What Is a Computer? While reading this paragraph underline the listing marks. Computers are thought to have many remarkable powers. However, most computers whether large or small have three basic capabilities. First, computers have circuits for performing arithmetic operations, such as addition, subtraction, division, multiplication and exponentiation. Second, computers have a means of communicating with the user. After all, if we couldn’t be of much use. Third, computers have circuits which can make decisions. The computer can only decide three things:
Exercise 2
Complete the following paragraph by filling in the blanks with appropriate listing markers.
Computers can do wonders, but they can waste a lot of money unless careful consideration goes into buying them. Any businessman thinking of buying a computer system should ..… admit he knows very little about computers….., he must realize that the computer salesman doesn’t know how his business works.
.…., that he should get that outside advice is a must, not necessarily from consultants but from other executives who have had recent experience buying a computer system ..… He should try to see systems similar to ones under consideration in operation. Because his operations will have the differences that must be accommodated, he should ….. find out what would be involved in upgrading a system. ….. Important thing to know before buying a computer is the financial situation of the supplier because computer companies come and go and not all are financially stable. ….. the perspective buyer should demand that every details be covered in writing. Including hardware and software, they are supplied by different companies. There’s nothing wrong with computers, it’s how and why they are used that can cause problem.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
73
VU
Lesson -12
Reading: Making Inferences Making Inferences
You are familiar with the expression “to read between the lines”, which means you pick up
ideas that are not directly stated in the material you are reading. The writer is giving or making a suggestion but stating it indirectly i.e. he is implying something. These implied ideas are often important for a full understanding of what the writer means. To discover the implied or underlying ideas in the writing is called ‘making inferences’ or drawing conclusion.
Our aim is to help you not only become a better reader but a strong thinker – a person able not only to understand what is read but to analyze and evaluate it as well. In fact, reading and thinking are closely related skills, and practice in thoughtful reading will also strengthen your ability to think clearly and logically. It is a higher level skill.
In everyday life, we keep on making inferences. For example, you go out in the street and you notice a large crowd gathered outside a shop, and you also notice a lot of broken glass on the road. As you get closer, you hear loud talking. Before you even reach the shop, you have inferred what all the fuss is about - there has been an accident.
How did you arrive at these inferences? First, you used your experience of life and general knowledge of people. Second, you made informed guesses which were based on the facts you observed. Remember not all your inferences will necessarily prove true. For example, it is possible that the crowd gathered outside is not because of an accident between cars etc. but because of a quarrel among some people and while fighting among themselves they hit the glass windows of the shop and it turned into a nasty brawl. In any case, the more evidence you have, the more solid your inferences are.
1. Consider two incidents. Write down on a piece of paper what you might infer if you saw the following two occurrences.
What would you infer?
The inferences you probably made are that, in the first situation, there is a public examination going on/or there is an important function taking place and some high-ranking person is present. And in the second situation you probably inferred that the dog has previously been maltreated and is afraid of people.
Look at the following two pictures on your screen and put a tick mark against the inference(s) most logically supported by the information given in the picture.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
74
VU
Picture 1:
The old woman is asking for something.
The old woman couldn’t see because of the smoke. The old woman was pointing to a no-smoking sign.
Picture 2 :
The man has a problem with his vision. The boy is doing his home work.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
75
VU
The man watches a lot of TV. The father cannot read.
Inferences in Reading:
In reading also we make logical jumps from the information given or stated directly to ideas that are not stated directly i.e. we make statements or draw conclusions about what is not known on the basis of what is known or given. So, to draw inferences the reader uses all the clues provided by the writer, his own experience i.e. the reader’s own experience and logic.
Sohail always sits in the last row of the classroom.
The given sentence tells us nothing about how Sohail feels about his college courses, how prepared he is, or how well he sees. So answers a, b or d are possibilities, but none is directly suggested by the sentence. The correct answer is therefore c. Based on the information we are given, we can conclude only that Sohail – for some reason – does not like sitting in the front. We are not given enough information to know why he feels this way. Remember your inferences will be stronger if you don’t jump to conclusions that are unsupported or that are only very weakly supported by the available information.
3. Now you will have some more practice in drawing inferences. Read the given sentences and put a tick mark by the inference, most logically supported by the information given in the sentence.
2. A man enters his office building, marches past a group of fellow employees without returning their greetings and goes into his office, slamming the door.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
76
VU
4. Read the passage & then check the four statements which are most logically supported by the information given.
1. The elimination of jobs because of super-automation is not limited to industrial factories
– offices are increasingly electronic. Engineers and architects now draw three dimensional designs, update them, test them, and store them almost instantaneously in computer. Agriculture employs robot fruit pickers and sheepshearers, computerized irrigation systems that use sensors to calculate water and fertilizer needs in different parts of a field, and automated chicken houses.
Retail stores, banks, and brokerage houses use on-line transaction processing to obtain instant information and to conduct transactions. Laser scanning and bar codes are transforming the physical handling of codes by retailers and wholesale distributors. A final example of technological change affecting jobs is the widespread use of televisions, telephones, and personal computers for the purposes of home banking and shopping.
2. a) You might like to ask why the Sun is able to supply its own light, heat, and energy, whereas the Earth and the other planets only shine feebly with the aid of borrowed light. Strange as it may seem, it is best to start this problem by considering the interior of the Earth.
b) The morrow brought a very sober-looking morning, the sun making only a few efforts to appear; and Catherine augured from it everything most favourable to her wishes. A bright morning so early in the year, she allowed, would generally turn to rain; but a cloudy one foretold improvement as the day advanced.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
77
VU
c) Your mother and I were so happy then. It seemed as though we had everything we could ever want. I think the last day the sun shone was when that dirty little train steamed out of that crowded, suffocating Indian station, and the battalion band playing for all it was worth. I knew in my heart it was all over then. Everything!
(No statements are given for these paragraphs) ((99922
Inferences in Literature:
If you are fond of reading novels, short stories, poetry, etc. you might be aware that inference is very important in understanding and appreciating literature. While nonfiction writers, that is, writers of factual material, usually state directly what they mean, fiction or creative writers often show what they mean by describing the scene or situation. It is for the reader to infer the point of what the writer has to say. I shall illustrate this with an example. A non-fiction writer might write:
Henry was angry at his wife.
A fiction/creative writer might write:
Henry’s eyes narrowed when his wife spoke to him. He cut her off in the middle of the sentence with the words,” I don’t have time to argue with you.”
23
Instead of simply stating that Henry was angry, the creative writer has through his description shown Henry’s anger. If you read literature – poetry, short stories, novels, biographies, etc… you need to apply inference skills. Your understanding and appreciation of such works where a lot of meaning is implied i.e. not stated directly, will depend on this skill. Now, I shall read a very short poem of four lines. It is written by the American poet James Russell Lowell and is called “Sixty – Eight Birthday”.
24
As life runs on, the road grows strange With faces new, and near the end
The milestones into headstones change, ‘Neath every one a friend.
J. R. Lowell
Milestone: a slab of stone set up in the ground to show the distance in miles on a road. Headstone: a stone which marks the top end of a grave, usually having the buried person’s name on it.
25
A time comes when life’s milestones turn into headstones, the markers set into graves, meaning in other words that life ends in death.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
78
VU
4. The final line implies that as we get older, more and more friends die. Under all the headstones are friends. Now we will discuss another short poem. Read the poem titled ‘Fog’ by Carl Sandburg and answer the questions given at the end.
27
Fog
The fog comes On little cat feet.
It sets looking ones harbor and city On silent haunches
And then moves on.
C Sandburg
Put a tick mark against the answer that is based on the poem.
29
Another way in which writers can indicate character is through the words they put into their character’s mouths. The readers have to read between the lines and infer meanings which may not be directly stated. This is true of novels and other genres of literature. In drama, for example, playwrights expect their audience to read between the lines of the dialogue and use inference to depict the diversity of their characterization.
31
This is, of course, an important- possibly the most important element of the dramatist’s art, to reveal his characters through their speech, but other writers employ the device as well.
Study the following passage from P.G. Wood house’s ‘Thank you, Jeeves’.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
79
VU
‘Jeeves’, I said, ‘do you know what?’ ‘No sir.’ 32
‘No, sir.
‘Do you know whom I saw last night? ‘No, sir.”
‘J. Washburn Stoker and his daughter, Pauline.’
‘Indeed, sir? ‘Awkward, what?’ 33
‘I can conceive that after what occurred in New York it might be distressing for you to encounter Miss Stoker, sir. But I fancy the contingency need scarcely arise.’
I weighed this.
‘When you start talking about contingencies arising, Jeeves, the brain seems to flicker and I rather miss the gist. Do you mean I ought to be able to keep out of her way? ‘Yes, sir.’
34
‘Avoid her? ‘Yes, sir.’
(P.G. WODEHOUSE, Thank You, Jeeves)
Look at Jeeves’s answers. Apart from one’s speech, they are very economical. What can we deduce about the kind of person Jeeves is, and his attitude towards his master from this economy of speech? What Jeeves actually says and what is implied?
35
In today's lesson you’ve had practice in reading between lines. First in non-fiction or factual writing and then in creative writing for finding out meaning that is not stated directly. This is a skill that you can only acquire by reading extensively.
\
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
80
VU
Lesson -13
Reading: Assessing the Text
In this lesson we will be looking at different ways of determining fact from opinion. In the second half, we will be looking at different ways of indicating time sequences in practical scientific texts.
Distinguishing Facts from Opinions:
Being able to dissociate facts from opinions is an essential first step in acquiring a critical ability. When most writers or speakers communicate, they include their opinions of a subject. What they say is, therefore, at least partly biased. While bias is unavoidable, writers do try to remain as objective as possible. Scientific reports are examples of writing in which authors try to be as factual as they can. However, there are other types of materials, such as newspaper editorials, political speeches, advertisement, etc… where opinions are central to the writing. In such writings the writer/author tries to convince readers to change their minds and share their view points. This means that facts and opinions are valuable to writers. But readers ought to know the difference between the two in order to evaluate what they read. In other words, a skilled reader must be able to distinguish fact from fiction. I am sure this is something we do already without realizing. Most of the time when we talk, we mix facts with opinions. In today’s lesson you will learn to sift fact from opinion.
What is a fact? A fact is a statement that can be proved true through objective evidence. Now, this evidence may be a physical proof, or the testimony of witnesses (spoken or written). The following are some facts which can be checked for accuracy and thus can be proved true:
Now we turn to opinion:
An opinion is a statement that cannot be objectively proved true or false. Opinions usually express beliefs, feelings, judgments that a person may have on or about a subject. Here are some opinions:
1. The Alhmara Arts Council building is the most beautiful building in Lahore.
Now, there is no way this statement can be proved true because people can look at the same building and come to different conclusions about its beauty.
“Beautiful” is a value-word – the word we use to express our judgment. Now remember value-words are signals that an opinion is being expressed. These value-words by their very nature represent opinions, not facts. e.g.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
81
VU
To sharpen your understanding about fact and opinion, read the following statements and decide whether they are facts (F) or opinions (O).
Some more points about fact and opinion:
While separating a fact form opinion, keep in mind that:
Sometimes, evidence may show that a fact is not true.
People sometimes present their opinions as facts. e.g.
At the first glance, the above statements appear as statements of fact but a closer examination will show that they are statements of opinion.
iii) Value-words often represent opinions.
Value-words are generally subjective, not objective and they express judgment. Factual statements report on observed reality while subjective statements interpret reality. For instance, some value words are:
good | bad | great |
best | worst | terrible |
better | lovely | wonder |
worse | disgusting | |
If someone says, “It’s raining outside”. Now, this observation is an objective one. It can be verified, but if someone says, “It’s bad weather”, this is a subjective statement - a personal interpretation of reality – some people consider rain to be good weather!
(iv) Much of what we read and hear is a mixture of fact and opinion:
Recognizing facts and opinions is important because a lot of information that we read and hear is really OPINION.
You might, for instance, read or hear the following:
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
82
VU
So far, you have read single statements; now you will read a passage. Be on the look out for opinion.
. 18
Sentence 2. expresses an opinion – to some Cleopatra may not be an interesting figure. Sentence 4 - opinion: how fascinating and easy to believe will differ from person to person. Sentence 6 - mixture of fact and opinion.
Facts Versus Opinions:
Read the following statements and decide whether they are facts or opinions:
Grellet, Francoise Developing Reading Skills, CUP, 1981, page239
1 a) You might like to ask why the Sun is able to supply its own light, heat, and energy, whereas the Earth and the other planets only shine feebly with the aid of borrowed light.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
83
VU
Strange as it may seem, it is best to start this problem by considering the interior of the Earth.
The Sequences
In lesson 11, we looked at some of the markers used for enumerating the order in which things are to be said when making lists or giving instructions. However, it didn’t mention those markers which outline the time sequence in which events occur. It is equally important to recognize the sequence of events, especially in such activities as scheduling, recounting historical facts, doing routine activities and conducting and describing experiments.
As we know, events do not simply occur; they occur either before, during or after other events. This time sequence may be chronological, logical or causal. Once a time-reference has been established, certain adjective and adverbials may order subsequent information in relation to it. The following tables are examples of time relaters.
Table1:
Previous to given time-references, i.e. before
TIME RELATERS
Examples
been in use for some time.
Table2:
Subsequent to time-reference, i.e. after
TIME RELATERS
Adjectives | earlier | preceding |
former | previous | |
Adverbials | already | earlier/previous |
prior | first | |
so far | before | |
formerly | yet | |
before that | up to now/then | |
before then | In the beginning | |
until now/then | (long) ago |
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
84
VU
Adverbials | Contemporary | Simultaneous |
at present | meanwhile | |
at this point | in the meantime | |
now | when | |
today | at the same time | |
for the time being | | |
at the moment | |
Examples
TIME RELATERS
Adjectives Adverbials | following afterwards after that eventually | later since since then by the time | next by the end soon next |
Examples:
N.B. Time sequence is also shown by different verb tenses.
Examples:
soon become obsolete.
Sample Paragraph
Computers, as we know them today, haven’t been around for a long time. It wasn’t until the mid-1940s that the first working digital computer was completed. But since then, computers have evolved tremendously. Vacuum tubes were used in the first-generation computers at the beginning of the 1960s. By the end of the 1960s, transistors were replaced by tiny integrated circuit boards and, consequently, a new generation of computers was on the market. Fourth-generation computers are now produced with circuits that are
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
85
VU
much smaller than before and fit on a single chip. Soon, fifth-generation computers will be produced, and these will, no doubt, be better than their predecessors.
Exercise
Read the following paragraph and as you read, underline the time relaters.
There are some who say that computers have a very short history but, because they are machines that manipulate numbers, others disagree. More than 5000 years ago, a need to count was recognized, and somebody had the idea of using first his fingers, then pebbles to keep track of the count.
History is not clear as to whether the need was recognized before or after the idea occurred. Since that time, the abacus was invented and some form of it was used well into the 16th century. During the 17th and 18th centuries many easy ways of calculating were devised. Logarithm tables, calculus and the basis for the modern slide rule were born out of that period of time. It was not until the early 1800s that the first calculating machine appeared and not too long after, Charles Babbage designed a machine which became the basis for building today’s computers.
A hundred years later the first analog computer was built, but the first digital computer was not complete until 1944. Since then computers have gone through four generations from digital computers using vacuum tubes in the 1950s, transistors in the early 1960s, integrated in the mid-60s, and a single chip in the 190s. At the rate computer technology is growing now, we can expect more changes in this field by the end of this decade.
Exercise (Answer)
Read the following paragraph and as you read, underline the time relaters.
There are some who say that computers have a very short history but, because they are machines that manipulate numbers, others disagree. More than 5000 years ago, a need to count was recognized, and somebody had the idea of using first his fingers, then pebbles to keep track of the count.
History is not clear as to whether the need was recognized before or after the idea occurred. Since that time, the abacus was invented and some form of it was used well into the 16th century. During the 17th and 18th centuries many easy ways of calculating were devised. Logarithm tables, calculus and the basis for the modern slide rule were born out of that period of time. It was not until the early 1800s that the first calculating machine appeared and not too long after, Charles Babbage designed a machine which became the basis for building today’s computers.
A hundred years later the first analog computer was built, but the first digital computer was not complete until 1944. Since then computers have gone through four generations from digital computers using vacuum tubes in the 1950s, transistors in the early 1960s, integrated in the mid-60s, and a single chip in the 1970s. At the rate computer technology is growing now, we can expect more changes in this field by the end of this decade.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
86
VU
Lesson -14
Reading: Assessing Texts
In today’s lesson, we are going to begin by looking at how writers bring their characters to life by employing different descriptive and other techniques. In the second half, we will go back to practical texts pertaining to your field of study related to computers.
Characters
Characters:
Almost every example of imaginative writing has to do with people in some way or the other. We are going to look at some of the ways in which a writer is able to translate his vision of the people. He is writing to the reader by means of words. In some ways, a painter or photographer has an easier task since he is able to present his ideas directly to us in visual terms-though, of course, interpretation is necessary here, too. How, then, does an author achieve the same effect using only words. The writer achieves this effect by:
One of the ways a writer does
My sister had a trenchant way of cutting our bread-and-butter for us that never varied. First, with her left hand she jammed the load hard and fast against her bib-where it sometimes got a pin into it, and sometimes a needle, which we afterwards got into our mouths. Then she took some butter (not too much) on a knife and spread it on the loaf, in an apothecary kind of way, as if she were making a plaster-using both sides of the knife with a slapping dexterity, and trimming and molding the butter off round the crust. Then, she gave the knife a final smart wipe on the edge of the plaster, and then sawed a very thick round off the loaf; which she finally, before separating from the loaf, hewed into two halves, of which Joe got one, and I the other.
(CHARLES DICKENS, Great Expectations)
What does this account of Mrs Gargery cutting bread tell us about her?
What impression does the use of words like ‘trenchant’ ‘jammed’, ‘slapping dexterity’, ‘a final smart wipe’, ‘sawed’ and ‘hewed’ build up?
Write your answers to these questions in your notebook: it is a good practice.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
87
VU
Study the following passage from P.G. Wodehouse’s ‘Thank you, Jeeves’. ‘Jeeves’, I said, ‘do you know what?’
No sir.’
‘Do you know whom I saw last night? ‘no, sir.”
‘J. Washburn Stoker and his daughter, Pauline.’ ‘Indeed, sir?
‘Awkward, what?’forming an action in a particular way that
r‘I can conceive that after what occurred in New York it might be distressing for you to encounter Miss Stoker, sir. But I fancy the contingency need scarcely arise.’
I weighed this.
‘When you start talking about contingencies arising, Jeeves, the brain seems to flicker and I rather miss the gist. Do you mean I ought to be able to keep out of her way?
‘Yes, sir.’ ‘Avoid her? ‘Yes, sir.’
(P.G. WODEHOUSE, Thank You, Jeeves)
‘Look at Jeeves’s answers. Apart from one’s speech, they are very economical. What can we deduce about the kind of person Jeeves is, and his attitude towards his master from this economy of speech? What Jeeves actually says and what is implied?
3. Direct Statements: Some writers tell us about their characters directly instead of showing them and allowing us to draw our own conclusions. They build detail on detail until we have a clear picture of their appearance, their habits, their opinions, and their life history. Here is an account of a character called Miss Arkwright.
She was in no way a remarkable person. Her appearance was not particularly distinguished and yet she was without any feature that could actively displease.
She had enough personal eccentricities to fit into the pattern of English village life, but none so absurd or anti-social that they could embarrass or even arouse gossip beyond what was pleasant to her neighbors. She accepted her position as an old maid with that cheerful good humor and occasional irony which are essential to English spinsters since the deification of Jane Austen, or more sacredly Miss Austen, by the upper middle classes, and she attempted to counteract the inadequacy of the unmarried state by quiet, sensible and tolerant social work in the local community. She was liked by nearly everyone, though she was not afraid of making enemies where she knew that her broad but deeply felt religious principles were being opposed. Any socially pretentious or undesirably extravagant conduct, too, was liable to call for her an unexpectedly caustic and well-aimed snub.
She was invited everywhere and always accepted the invitations. Quietly but well dressed, with one or two very fine old pieces of jewellery that had come down to her from her grandmothers, she would pass from one group to another, laughing or serious as the occasion demanded.
She listened with patience, but with a slight twinkle in her eye, to Mr Hodson’s endless stories of life in Dar-es-Salaam or Myra Hop’s breathless accounts of her latest system of diet. John Hobday in his somewhat ostentatiously gentleman-farmer attire would describe his next novel about East Anglican life to her before, even, his beloved daughter had heard of it.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
88
VU
Richard Trelawney, just down from Oxford, found that she had read and really know Donne’s sermons, yet she could swoop detective stories with Colonel Wright by the hour, and was his main source for quotations when The Times cross-word was in question. It was she who incorporated little Mrs Grantham into village life, when that underbred, suburban woman came there as Colonel Grantham’s second wife, checking her vulgar remarks about ‘the lower classes’ with kindly humor, but defending her against the formidable battery of Lady Vernon’s antagonism. Yet, it was also she who was first at Lady Vernon’s when Sir Robert had his stroke and her unobtrusive kindliness and real services gained her a singular position behind the grim reserve of the Vernon family.
She could always banter the vicar away from his hobby horse of the Greek rite when at rural community meetings the agenda seemed to have been buried for ever beneath a welter of Euchologia and Menaia. She checked Sir Robert’s anti-Bolshevik phobia from victimizing the Country Librarian for her Fabianism but was fierce in her attack on the local council when she thought that class prejudice had prevented Commander Osborne’s widow from getting council house.
She led, in fact, an active and useful existence, yet when anyone praised her she would only laugh-‘My dear’, she would say ‘hard work’s the only excuse old maids like me have got for existing at all, and even then I don’t know that they oughtn’t to lethalize the lot of us.’ As the danger of war grew nearer in the thirties, her favorite remark was ‘Well, if they've got any sense this time they’ll keep the young fellows at home and put us useless old maids in the trenches,’ and she said it with real conviction.
(ANGUS WILSON, A Little Companion)
Now sum up in a few sentences the main points of Miss Arkwright’s character. What are the reported comments that are typical of her character?
Here is a description of Miss Murdstone.
‘It was Miss Murdstone who arrived, and a gloomy-looking lady she was; dark, like her brother, whom she greatly resembled in face and voice; and with very heavy eyebrows, nearly meeting over her large nose, as if, being disabled by the wrongs of her kind from wearing whiskers, she had carried them to that account.
She brought with her two uncompromising hard black boxes, with her initials on the lids in hard brass nails. When she paid the coachman she took the money from a hard steel purse, and she kept the purse in a very jail of a bag which hung upon her arm by a heavy chain, and shut up like a bite. I had never, at that time, seen such a metallic lady altogether as Miss Murdstone was.’
(CHARLES DICKENS, David Copperfield)
Pick out the words or objects that directly suggest metal. Which words in the description of Miss Murdstone do suggest characteristics of metal? How is this association with metal appropriate?
Who can ever forget, for instance, Uriah Heep in Charles Dickens’s David Copperfield
being ‘ever so humble’ and rubbing his hands together, words and an action that are forever
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
89
VU
associated with him? It was no fancy of mine about his hands, I observed; for he frequently ground the palms against each other as if to squeeze them dry and warm, besides often wiping them, in a stealthy way, on his pocket handkerchief.
Here is a lesser known character from ‘Hard Times’:
Thomas Grandgrind, sir. A man of realities. A man of facts and calculations. A man who proceeds upon the principle that two and two are four, and nothing over, and who is not to be taled into allowing for anything over. Thomas Gradgrind, sir-peremptorily Thomas- Thomas Gradgrind.
With a rule and a pair of scales, and the multiplication table always in his pocket, sir, ready to weight and measure any parcel of human nature, and tell you exactly what it comes to. It is a mere question of figures, a case of simple arithmetic. You might hope to get some other nonsensical belief into the head of George Gradgrind, or Augustus Gradgrind, or John Gradgrind, or Joseph Gradgrind (all suppositious, non-existent persons), but into the head of Thomas Gradgrind-no sir!
(CHARLES DICKENS, Hard Times)
Underline the words that reinforce the idea that Thomas Gradgrind is a man of facts and calculations. What does the use of word ‘sir’ add to the passage?
5. Choice of words and picking out a particular feature or detail that calls the character vividly to mind:
Here are some examples taken from Edward Blishen’s ‘A Cackhanded War’:
‘He was a tiny fellow, with a leathery white face under black hair, and tied to the case he’d brought were the most enormous gumboots I’d ever seen.’
‘Mrs Goss was a widow, a neat little woman of over seventy: and witchlike.’
‘He was a deeply depressed man, this farmer, who always wore a white coat and cloth cap, and was always peppered with a white-and-black bristle.’
‘He was a tall, silent, dark man, very gentle, who would tut over his machine as if it were some moody woman.’ On the strawstack was a boy: a short, stout boy with a kind of naked pertness about his eyes and a very runny nose.’ Describe five varied characters, using one sentence for each, and try to make them alive by the way you use words or by giving to each a particular descriptive detail that defines him.
for example | examples of | shown by |
for instance | instances of | exemplifies |
an example of this | cases of | shows |
as an example | illustration of | illustrates |
that is | exemplified by | a second/third |
such as | illustrated by | example etc. |
Like | seen in | namely |
Sample sentences with examples in italics:
1. The switches, like the cores, are capable of being in one of two possible states that is, on or off; magnetized or unmagnetized. 2. Computers have circuits for performing arithmetic operations such as: addition subtraction, division, multiplication and exponentiation. 3. The
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
90
VU
computer can only decide three things, namely: Is one number less than another? Are two numbers equal? Is one number greater than another?
N.B. Sometimes the markers follow the example, separated by commas.
Not all texts present examples explicitly, some exemplifications are given implicitly, in which case, the above markers are not used. With this we come to the end of this lesson. We have looked at how writers use characterization in literary
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
91
VU
Lesson -15
Evaluating Texts: Interpreting Visual Data Interpreting Visual Data
In today’s lesson, we will first deal with interpreting visual data and second how to make comparisons. We will show you some means of communications which are primarily visual. Among these means are: graphs, charts, diagrams, tables, and maps. Most textbooks include tables, graphs and maps, etc. They are all aids to help you understand interpret the material you are reading.
Because of the importance of visuals, and the possibility of their being misinterpreted, you will see: i) how words and figures can be converted into visuals of one kind or another, and
ii) learn to read accurately these common aids. The following example shows you how information consisting of words and figures can be converted into a visual.
Our experience is that after listening to an hour’s lecture, students begin very rapidly to forget the information given to them. Twenty-four hours after the lecture, most of the students will have forgotten 75% of the information. After forty-eight hours, the amount the students remember has usually sunk to 15%. Yet, if the students review the information by noting the key points in the first place and then reading over or discussing or using their notes, the retention levels are as high as 70-85%.
Here you have been presented findings in words and numerals. Let’s put these findings into graph form, so that you can ‘see’ them better.
Tables: The purpose of a table is to give the reader numerical information at a glance. They are used to show various kinds of information in clear, compact columns. You are all familiar with a time table. You had one in your school and college – it was a plan of the whole week – how classes were scheduled. In the same way, you are familiar with airline and train time tables or schedules. You are also familiar with tables in mathematics, physics, or chemistry. Tables are useful for quick reference, but they require careful reading.
When you read a table:
iii)
(i) Read the title of the table first: that will tell you what information is shown in that table.
ii) Always look at the footnote given at the end or bottom of the table. It will explain or give additional information that is necessary for an accurate interpretation of the data.
Next, you must ask yourself if the information given in the table is reliable. For this, you must check the source of information in the table.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
92
VU
Now look at the following table taken from R.C. Yorkey ‘Study Skills for Students of English’ p. 173 and mark the following statements as true (T) or false (F).
T
(The letters T and F should be capital and the answers must be in the given boxes.)
Graphs: Another way of showing information is through graphs. A graph illustrates a relationship between at least two things, one of which is measured on a vertical axis, and the other(s) on a horizontal axis.
Look at the following graph taken from R.C. Yorkey ‘Study Skills for Students of English’
p. 177 and answer the questions that follow.
Answer the first five following questions by writing true (T) or false (F) and the last five by writing the information.
1.
2.
3.
Specific years are indicated on the vertical axis. F
The legend (explanatory words on a graph, map, etc…) shows how many men finished elementary school, high school, and college. F
The mean income of high school graduates is consistently higher than that
of elementary school graduates. T
4.
5.
College graduates earn the highest income. T
This graph shows that female college graduates earn more money than male
high school graduates. F
10,000 .
12,000 .
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
93
VU
Bar Graphs (:)
A bar graph is similar to a line graph except that the bars (extending from either the vertical or the horizontal axis) are used instead of dots and lines. Look at the following bar graph which is taken from R.C.Yorkey p. 178 and which gives data from the world Almanac, 1979, and then answer the questions that follow.
Answer the following questions by writing true or false.
Answer the following questions by writing on the lines provided.
370,000,000 .
German and Portuguese .
Mandrain .
Urdu
1. Japan is composed of four major islands. The biggest island is Honshu. What are the names of the other ones?
Kyushu, Shikoku, Hokkaido
Hokkaido Kyushu
4. Japan is surrounded by an ocean and three seas. Name the ocean Pacific. Name the seas Philippines Sea, Sea of Japan, East China Sea
Sea of Japan Philippines Sea
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
94
VU
Nagoya is to the East of Tokyo and to the North East of Osaka.
Mutsu Bay is at the Northern tip of Honshu. The city of Nagasaki is at the Western tip of Kyushu.
Europe
USSR
True or False:
Study the charts again and say whether the following statements are True or False.
ill move on to t of the lesson Making Comparisons
1 Formation
There are several ways of showing similarities or differences that exist between or amongst things. The regular comparative and superlative of descriptive words, whether these are adjectives or adverbs, are formed as follows:
1. By adding the ending -er and -est to words of one syllable Examples
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
95
VU
ABSOLUTE COMPARATIVE SUPERLATIVE
Adjectives | new old big | newer older bigger | newest oldest biggest |
Adverbs | soon late | sooner later | soonest latest |
2.By placing the words more and most in front of words with three or more syllables Examples:
ABSOLUTE COMPARATIVE SUPERLATIVE
Adjectives | interesting convenient beautiful | more interesting more convenient more beautiful | most interesting most convenient most beautiful |
Adverbs | easily carefully | more easily more carefully | most easily most carefully |
Words with two syllables may be like 1 or 2 above in that they will add the ending -er and - est if they end in –y or-ly, -ow, -le and -er. Most of the remaining words take more and most in front of them.
k1 or 2 above in t
ABSOLUTE COMPARATIVE SUPERLATIVE
-y | happy funny | happier funnier | happiest funniest |
-ly | early friendly | earlier friendlier | earliest friendliest |
-ow | shallow narrow | shallower narrower | shallowest narrowest |
-le -er | able gentle clever | abler gentler cleverer | ablest gentlest cleverest |
N.B.
Two-syllable adverbs ending in -ly take more or most.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
96
VU
Examples: | | |
quickly | more quickly | most quickly |
slowly | more slowly | most slowly |
badly Examples: | more badly | most badly |
| ABSOLUTE | COMPARATIVE SUPER | LATIVE |
Remaining descriptive two- syllable | careful careless boring awful complex | more careful more careless more boring more awful more complex | most careful most careless most boring most awful most complex |
words | | | |
4. Some common two-syllable adjectives can have either type of formation.
Example
Absolute | Comparative Su | perlative |
common | commoner more common | commonest most common |
handsome | handsomer more handsome | handsomest most handsome |
polite | politer more polite | politest most polite |
quiet | quieter more quiet | quietest most quiet |
ere are a small nu | mber of adjectives and | adverbs that form th |
Th e comparative and
superlative using a different stem. These irregular comparisons are as follows:
Example
| Absolute | Comparative Superlative | |
Adjectives | bad far good many | worse further/farther better more | worst furthest/farthest best most |
Adverbs | badly fair little much well | worse further/farther less more better | worst furthest/farthest least most best |
| | | |
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
97
VU
There are many reasons for using comparisons in discourse. They may be used to show:
(a.) Equivalence:
The following words or constructions are used to show equivalence (i.e. the same).
as…as | are similar | each |
as many …as | equal to | either |
as much … as | is like | all |
the same…as | similar/ly | both |
Similar to | equal/ly | alike |
the same | compare to/with | |
Examples
(b.) Non-equivalence
The following words and/or constructions are used to show non-equivalence i.e. not the same).
not as … as | greater than | unequal (ly) |
word + er than | not as much… as | unlike |
more… than | neither …nor …as | not the same as |
fewer … than | not as many …as | not all |
less … than | not equal to | |
Examples
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
98
VU
(c.) The superlative
The following words and/or constructions are used to show one item compared with others (i.e. the superlative).
the word + est the most + word the least + word
Examples
(d.) Parallel increase:
The following words and/or constructions are used to show parallel increase (i.e. two comparatives)
the (word + er), the more + word the (word+er), the less + word 62
Examples
Exercise 1
Decide whether each sentence expresses equivalence, non-equivalence, or the superlative, then underline the words expressing the comparison.
…………….1. Speeds for performing decision making operations are comparable to those for arithmetic operations.
…………….2. Even the most sophisticated computer, no matter how good it is, must be told what to do.
……….. .3. A computer can perform similar operations thousands of times, without becoming bored, tired or even careless.
…………….4. For example, modern computers can solve certain classes of arithmetic problems millions of times faster than a skilled mathematician.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
99
VU
66
……………….5. One of the most important reasons why computers are used so widely today is that almost every big problem can be solved by solving a number of little problems.
…………….6. Finally a computer, unlike a human being, has no intuition.
Exercise 1: Answer
Decide whether each sentence expresses equivalence, non-equivalence, or the superlative, then underline the words expressing the comparison.
…equivalence 1. Speeds for performing decision making operations are comparable to those for arithmetic operations.
…superlative 2. Even the most sophisticated computer, no matter how good it is, must be told what to do.
65
… equivalence . 3. A computer can perform similar operations thousands of times, without becoming bored, tired or even careless.
…nonequivalence 4.For example, modern computers can solve certain classes of arithmetic problems millions of times faster than a skilled mathematician.
…superlative 5.One of the most important reasons why computers are used so widely today is that almost every big problem can be solved by solving a number of little problems.
…non-equivalence 6. Finally a computer, unlike a human being, has no intuition.
Exercise 2
Read the text on ‘Microcomputers’, and as you read, complete the table below by writing the sentence or that part of the sentence from each paragraph that expresses a comparison. This text is about the history of micro computers, and how computers have evolved into the very fast and efficient machines that they are today.
1- The early 1970s saw the birth of the microcomputer, or micro for short. The central processor of the micro, called the microprocessor, is built as a single semiconductor device; that is, the thousands of individual circuit elements necessary to perform all the logical and arithmetic functions of a computer are manufactured as a single chip. A complete microcomputer system is composed of a microprocessor, a memory and peripheral equipment.
The processor, memory and electronic controls for the peripheral equipment are usually put together on a single or on a few printed circuit boards. Systems using microprocessors can be hooked up together to dot the work that until recently only minicomputer systems were capable of doing. Micros generally have somewhat simpler and less flexible instruction sets than minis, and are typically much slower.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
100
VU
Different micros are available with 4-, 8-, 16- bit word lengths. Similarly, minis are available with word lengths up to 32 bits. Although minis can be equipped with much larger primary memory sizes, micros are becoming more powerful and converging with minicomputer technology.
For example, thousands of industrial robots are in use today, and the number is growing very rapidly as this relatively new industry improves the price and performance of its products by using the latest microcomputers.
In addition to their extensive use in control systems of all types, they are destined for many new uses from more complex calculators to automobile engine operation and medical diagnostics. They are already used in automobile emission control systems and are the basis of many TV game attachments. There is also a rapidly growing market for personal computers whose application potential in education is only just beginning to be exploited.
PARA EQUIVALENCE SUPERLATIVE | NON-EQUIVALENCE |
(1) 1. is built as a single semi conductor 2. 3. | 1. 2. 3. micros are becoming more powerful |
(2) 1. | |
(3) 1. | 1. |
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
101
VU
| |
(4) 1. as is the case in the space shuttle program | 1. 2. from more complex calculators to |
(5) 1. | |
Answer:
PARA EQUIVALENCE SUPERLATIVE | NON-EQUIVALENCE |
|
|
(2) 1. as cheaply as$10 | |
(3) 1. more rapidly than micros | 1.using the latest micros |
(4) 1. as is the case in the space shuttle program |
|
(5) 1. micros could decrease by as much | |
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
102
VU
Lesson -16
Reading: Evaluating Texts Evaluating Texts
One vital aspect of reading comprehension is the ability to assess and evaluate the text.
This means, first of all, that the reader should be fully aware of the writer’s intention of his point of view, and possible bias. In order to evaluate a text, the student must be able to discriminate facts from opinions. It is an important part of reading competence that the reader should be aware of the way his judgment is influenced one way or another.
So far you have had practice in distinguishing facts from opinions. In today's lesson you will first have practice in distinguishing the writer’s Tone, and second, you will look at argumentation - which is very central to the material that we read. Writers make a point and then support the point. You as a successful reader must learn to recognize the point and recognize the support for the point.
TONE Look at the five statements expressing different attitudes about a ‘shabby house.’ Label each statement by choosing the most appropriate tone from the word bank.
optimistic sentimental
bitter humorous
tolerant sympathetic
bad. (tolerant)
If only I had a decent job, I wouldn’t be reduced to living in this ramshackle dump. (bitter)
This place is in need of some costly renovation, and I expect the landlord to get around to them any day now. (optimistic)
When I leave this joint, I plan to empty rubbish bins of all the neighboring flats into it so I can leave the place exactly as I found it. (humorous)
3.
4.
5.
Now I helped you in this exercise. See if you can do the next one on your own. But b helped you in this exercise. See if you can do the next one on your own. But before you do the Now I helped you in this exercise. See if you can do the next one on your own. But before you do the next exercise, I must tell you something about IRONY. This is a commonly used tone and one which you may not be familiar with. When writing has an ironic tone, it says one thing and means the opposite. Irony is found in everyday conversation as well as in writing. Irony always involves ‘discrepancy’ - meaning that something doesn’t quite fit - and it usually takes two forms situational and verbal.
ext exercise I must tell you something about IRONY. This is a commonly used tone
(I) Situational irony occurs when the discrepancy lies in the situation itself. You expect something but something else happens. Or a situation calls for an expected response but something unexpected happens instead e.g. there is a house on fire and you expect the fire fighter to aim a water hose / pipe at the fire, but instead he aims a petrol pipe / hose. That would be very ironical.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
103
VU
Or you may have heard of the situation in a play by the American playwright, William Inge’s ‘A Social Event’ where the proud Hollywood couple is to be entertained. Afro- American maid has an invitation to a special event to which the couple has NOT been invited: very ironical situation indeed.
(II) Verbal irony occurs when there is discrepancy between what is said and what is meant e.g. usually the exact opposite, or a near opposite of what is meant: an eager cricket player looks out of the window and sees that it is raining. “Oh, great!” he says, meaning exactly the opposite. Another example to illustrate this: After seeing a terrible performance by an actor in a movie someone might say “Now that’s an actor who is sure to win the Best Actor Award for this year!” – Both examples illustrate verbal irony.
a Now you will look at three short passages each of which illustrates a tone given in the box. Remember the tone reflects the author’s attitude. To find the tone of a paragraph, ask yourself what attitude is revealed by its words and phrases.
caring optimistic
pessimistic angry
response but something
objective
critical a situation calls for an expected unexpected happens instead e.g. there is a
house on fire and you ex
pi e 13
14
15
ARGUMENT
A good argument is one in which you make a point and then provide support (persuasive and logical evidence) to back it up. For example, if you make the statement “My neighbors are inconsiderate.”, we expect you to provide supporting details which would enable others to see and judge whether your neighbors are really inconsiderate or not.
16
Now if you added: “They play loud music at night, their children play and scream loudly outside my house, and their dog barks all day long”. You have provided solid support to your earlier statement “My neighbors are inconsiderate”.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
104
VU
In the following groups of statements, one statement is the point and the others are support for the point. Identify each point with (P) and identify each statement of support with (S).
I. Cats refuse to learn silly tricks just to amuse people. Cats seem to be more intelligent than dogs. Dogs will accept mistreatment, but a cat if mistreated, it runs away.
18
. 20
In the first type – fallacies that ignore the issue you will find that the writer may change the subject, or indulge in circular reasoning, or give way to personal attack, or may create an imaginary opponent. In the second type – FALLACIES that over generalize/ oversimplify issues – the writer may draw hasty conclusions on the basis of insufficient evidence, or assume that because a certain event follows an earlier event, the subsequent event was the cause of the earlier event, or may make false comparison or analogy, or the either-or- fallacy.
21
First I show you examples of unsound reasoning, then you will do a few exercises which will give you practice in spotting them in your reading.
A. FALALCIES THAT IGNORE THE ISSUE (3 types)
a) Changing the Subject
In this method of argument the writer tries to divert the audience’s attention from the true issue by presenting evidence that has nothing to do with the argument e.g. The honorable member of the National Assembly is a capable leader. He has a busy family life and prays daily in the area mosque.
22
Mention of the member’s family life and religious life sidesteps the issue of just how capable a leader he is.
23
Exercise 1
The proposed new dam is going to be a disaster. The plans were drawn up nearly thirty years ago, when the affected area was lightly settled. Now, a generation later the area is thickly populated and hundreds of families would be displaced if the dam is built. There are
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
105
VU
already many forces working for the break up of the family unit in Pakistan these days. The environment will also be negatively affected by the construction of the dam. Hundreds of birds will lose their natural habitat and may die out.
24
a. Which sentence is not a sound argument in support of the author’s conclusion that the proposed dam is a disaster?
b) Circular reasoning
In this the supporting reason is the same as the conclusion. e.g. “Mr. Abid is a great science teacher because he is so wonderful at teaching.” We do not know why Mr. Abid is a great teacher. No real reasons are given – the statement merely repeats itself.
iound in everyday conversation as well as in writing. Irony always involves ‘discrepancy’ – E
Exercise 2:
Try to spot the circular reasoning in the following arguments.
If you look closely at these arguments, you will notice that the reasons merely repeat an important part of the conclusion. The careful reader wants to know the reason, supporting evidence, not a repetition.
that something doesn’t quite fit - and it usually takes two forms situational and verbal.
o In the first argument the author uses the idea that persons under 18 are too young to vote as the conclusion and the reason of the argument. No real reason is advanced for why persons under 18 are too young to vote. In the second argument, the word healthy which is used in the conclusion conveys the same idea as wellbeing. Conclusion and reason are used as one.
w I helped you in this exercise. See if you can do the next one on your own. But before you do the n
c) Personal Attack: This kind of fallacy often occurs in political debate. Here the issue under discussion is ignored and the writer or speaker focuses attention on the opponent’s character. For example,
“The Honorable Member of National Assembly views on the tax bill are not worthy of consideration. His father also held similar views when he was a member of the assembly”. As you can see from this example it ignores the issue - the tax bill – and concentrates on personal character. It is always easy recognizing personal attack.
28
Exercise
Which one of the following statements contains an example of personal attack?
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
106
VU
3. The people who oppose the new traffic ticketing system are not concerned about traffic rules.
29
B. FALLACIES THAT OVERGENERALIZE/ OVER SIMPLIFY ISSUES (4 types)
a) Hasty generalization (b) false cause (c) false comparison (d) either- or fallacy
a) Hasty generalization:
This is a very common fallacy. A person who draws a conclusion on the basis of insufficient evidence is making a hasty generalization. The following example will make this amply clear.
30
The Iranians are a very stupid people as they have no talent for mathematics. Two Iranian boys took math course with me once, and they were at the bottom of the class. Forming a conclusion about a whole nation on the basis of two examples (boys) is an illogical jump. ext exercise I must tell you something about IRONY. This is a commonly used tone and one which Exercise
Three statements are given followed by four possible conclusions. Three of these are hasty generalizations which cannot logically be drawn from the evidence given, and the fourth one is a valid conclusion. Choose the one conclusion you think is valid.
Out of the four conclusions given which one would you choose as the most valid?
Which one did you choose? Obviously the correct answer would be c.
b) False Cause: You have probably heard some one saying as a joke, “I know there is going to be a dust storm today because I washed my hair”. Now the two events mentioned have no connection whatsoever. Well that was just to tell you how often in life we make such wrong associations – we assume Cause-and-effect situations are not easy to analyze, as people tend to oversimplify them by ignoring other possible causes. To identify an argument using a false cause, look for alternate
causes. Look at the following argument:
The Atlas Tyre Company was more prosperous before Mr. Hamid joined it as chairman. Clearly, he is the cause of its decline.
Event A: Mr. Hamid became company chairman. Event B: The Atlas Tyre Company’s income
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
107
VU
declined.
Well, other causes could have been responsible for it.
may not be familiar with. When writing has an ironic tone, it says one thing and means the opposi. May be the policies of the previous chairman have now begun to affect the company, or perhaps the market conditions have changed. It’s easy but incorrect to assume that just because A came before B, therefore A caused B.
. 36
Exercise: Which one of the following statements contains an example of false cause?
Irony is found in everyday conversation as well as in writing. Irony always involves ‘discrepancy’ - m 37
(c) False Comparison: This is the third type of error in reasoning –when you assume that two things are
more alike than they really are. For instance read the following argument:
In our village we leave our doors unlocked all the time, so I don’t think its necessary for you in the city to have locks on your front door. To judge whether or not the above statement is a false comparison consider if the two situations are alike. The two situations are not alike-one is in a city where there may be a lack of security.
38
Exercise: Decide which one of the following statements contains an example of false comparison.
39
(d) Either – or fallacy:
We often assume there are only two sides to a question. Offering only two choices when more actually exist is an either- or fallacy.
Consider the following example:
Those who oppose unrestricted speech are in reality in favor of censorship.
This statement ignores the fact that a person can believe in free speech and at the same time believe in laws that prohibit people from making false statements which damage another person’s reputation-i.e. slander. Now remember only some issues/problems have two sides. only- for instance you either pass the exam or you don’t but most issues/problems have several facets or
sides. 40
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
108
VU
Exercise: Decide which one of the following statements contains an example of either- or fallacy.
it.
In today’s lesson we looked at different ways to develop effective reading and clear thinking – and these were: identifying purpose and tone and evaluating arguments. These were aimed at developing advanced, critical levels of comprehension. In the next lesson we shall look at an another way of developing comprehension.
eaning that something doesn’t quite fit - and it usually takes two forms situational and verbal.
the next exercise I must tell you something about IRONY. This is a commonly used tone and one which you may not be familiar with. When writing has an ironic tone, it says one thing and means the opposite. Irony is found in everyday conversation as well as in writing. Irony always involves ‘discrepancy’ - meaning that something doesn’t quite fit - and it usually takes two forms situational and verbal.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
109
VU
Lesson -17
Reading: Cloze for Comprehension
So far the main reading activity that you have had practice in has been the usual reading comprehension. It required you to concentrate only on certain sections of the reading passage. In this lesson, you will be introduced to another procedure for developing reading comprehension, known as the CLOZE procedure.
What is this cloze procedure? A passage is selected from which words are deleted at regular intervals. You, the reader, have to fill in the missing words. To fill the deletion, the learner concentrates on a wider proportion of the text. It also requires of words at regular intervals ensures that him / her to make inferences as well.
The deleted words usually comprise grammatical and lexical words and it is the student’s choice of words to fill in the gaps that reveals his/her understanding of the passage as well as grasp of the language.
The cloze has several points in its favour.
Cloze thus helps in developing the habit of concentrated reading, of going beyond the immediate sentence for drawing meaning, in skimming to recap on what has been read and in scanning for unspecified information in order to predict.
The cloze is essentially a cognitive/mental task which requires the completion of meaning based on understanding and reason. It involves the reader in active interaction with the text to predict the missing word while making use of context clues. Once you have grasped the basic techniques you will begin to enjoy it as a guessing game - not wild guesses, but informed guesses. Look at the following passage so that you get a rough idea of what it is about.
Notice the first two sentences and the last sentence does not have any gaps. This is to help you understand the overall meaning of the passage.
Exercise 1. A good education should, among other things, train you to think for yourself. The examination system does anything but that. What has to be learnt 1 strictly laid down by 2 syllabus, so the student 3 only what is prescribed. Examinations 4 not motivate a student 5 read widely; they 6 his reading. They do 7 encourage him to seek 8 knowledge; they narrow the 9 of study.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
110
VU
They lower 10 standards of teaching, for 11 deprive the teacher of 12 freedom. Teachers themselves are 13 judged by examination by results, 14 instead of teaching their 15, they are reduce to 16 their students in the 17 of taking examinations which 18 despise. The most successful 19 are not always the 20 educated. They are merely the best trained in the technique of working under stress and strain.
Answer:
Exercise 1 A good education should, among other things, train you to think for yourself. The examination system does anything but that. What has to be learnt 1 is strictly laid down by 2 the syllabus, so the student 3 does / learns only what is prescribed. Examinations 4 do not motivate a student 5 to read widely; they 6 restrict / curb his reading. They do 7 not encourage him to seek 8 further / more knowledge; they narrow the 9 field of study. They lower 10 the standards of teaching, for 11 they deprive the teacher of 12 all / his / her freedom. Teachers themselves are 13 often judged by examination by results, 14 so / and instead of teaching their 15, subjects they are reduce to 16 training their students in the 17 art / technique of taking examinations which 18 they despise. The most successful 19 students are not always the 20 best educated. They are merely the best trained in the technique of working under stress and strain.
Exercise 2 Global warming is by no means a new phenomenon: it has been around since the creation of Planet Earth itself. At fist the process was beneficial: it brought Earth out of the ice ages into a time when humanity could survive on it. Now, however, it has become a problem. 1 has happened in 2 ways, the ‘runway’ 3 effect and ozone 4 depletion. This is 5 the greenhouse effect 6 : ordinarily
energy from 7 Sun reaches the 8 and is reflected 9 into space, but 10
greenhouse gases forming layer around the planet, the reflection process cannot take place and the energy is trapped, heating up the atmosphere.
(Saifullah & Ismail)
Exercise 2 Global warming is by no means a new phenomenon: it has been around since the creation of Planet Earth itself. At first the process was beneficial: it brought Earth out of the ice ages into a time when humanity could survive on it. Now, however, it has become a problem. 1 This has happened in 2 two ways, the ‘runway’ 3 greenhouse effect and ozone 4 layer depletion. This is 5 how the greenhouse effect 6 works: ordinarily energy from 7 the Sun reaches the 8 Earth and is reflected 9 back into space, but 10 with greenhouse gases forming layer around the planet, the reflection process cannot take place and the energy is trapped, heating up the atmosphere.
(Saifullah & Ismail)
These were samples of regular, standard type of cloze where the gaps / blanks occur after a fixed number of words and these blanks may be filled with any word that is appropriate in terms of linguistic and contextual criteria. There are many variations of the standard cloze. Now I shall pace you through some alternative forms.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
111
VU
Exercise 3 Selected Deletions Cloze
Notice the blanks are not after a fixed number of words.
My dear children,
It’s hard to believe that I’ve been here for a month. The time passes so quickly and there’s so much to do. I’ve managed to see all the members of the family. I 1 as much time as I can with the children. Last week I 2 -Mark and Michelle to the circus. 3
never been before as they live quite far from the nearest city and their parents 4
have time to drive them there. I 5 that’s what grandmothers are for. At any 6 Susan lent me her car - it’s a brand 7 bright red Mini. We left early in the morning so as to make a day of 8 .
In the morning we 9 to the zoo and in the afternoon to the circus.
As 10 can imagine, the children were very excited. They loved everything. Mark 11
the wild animals the most exciting and Michelle is 12 to be an acrobat when she grows 13 .
After we’d been there for about two hours we 14 an announcement over the loudspeaker. The owner of the red Mini, number PUR 727V, 15 requested to come to the manager’s office 16 . Naturally, I didn’t know the number of 17
car so I left the children and went to the manager’s office to 18 out if it was our car.
The manager looked very upset and 19 . No one else had answered his call so I assumed correctly that it was Susan’s car. 20 that I’d left the lights on, or parked in 21 way, I wasn’t 22 concerned, but I didn’t know why the manager looked so disturbed. He began to 23 what happened and it took me some time to understand 24
confused explanation.
25 appears that the elephants are trained to sit on red boxes. One of the elephants 26
escaped and when he saw the 27 red car he promptly sat on 28 ! As you can imagine the car looked a mess. One side was squashed 29 but it was still possible to drive. The manager assured 30 that the circus would pay for the 31 . He couldn’t have been more apologetic.
The children were very 32 and giggled about the incident all the way home. 33
before we got there, we 34 the scene of a serious accident. About a mile 35 on a policeman stopped us and asked if we’d 36 involved in the accident. I wish I had a 37 of his face when I told him what had happened 38
the car.
I think he wanted to arrest me for drunken driving! Fortunately the 39 were there to back me up.40 are you managing without me? please don’t 41 to water my plants. I’m planning to leave here 42 the end of the month.
My love to you all.
Mom
(Cloze in Class: Moller & Whiteson)
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
112
VU
Answer:
Exercise 3 Selected Deletion Cloze
Notice the blanks are not after a fixed number of words.
My dear children,
It’s hard to believe that I’ve been here for a month. The time passes so quickly and there’s so much to do. I’ve managed to see all the members of the family. I 1 spend as much time as I can With the children. Last week I 2 took Mark and Michelle to the circus. 3 They’d never been to one before as they live quite far from the nearest city and their parents 4 never have time to drive them there. I 5 suppose / think that’s what grandmothers are for.
At any 6 rate Susan lent me her car - it’s a brand 7 new bright red Mini. We left early in the morning so as to make a day of 8 it.
In the morning we 9 went to the zoo and in the afternoon to the circus.
As 10 you can imagine, the children were very excited. They loved everything. Mark 11 found the wild animals the most exciting and Michelle is 12 going to be an acrobat when she grows 13 up.
After we’d been there for about two hours we 14 heard an announcement over the loudspeaker. The owner of the red Mini, number PUR 727V, 15 was requested to come to the manager’s office 16 immediately. Naturally, I didn’t know the number of 17 the / Susan’s car so I left the children and went to the manager’s office to 18 find out if it was our car.
The manager looked very upset and 19 embarrassed / disturbed. No one else had answered his call so I assumed correctly that it was Susan’s car. 20 Imagining / Thinking / Fearing / Assuming that I’d left the lights on, or parked in 21 someone’s way, I wasn’t 22 too / very concerned, but I didn’t know why the manager looked so disturbed. He began to 23 explain what happened and it took me some time to understand 24 his confused explanation.
25 It appears that the elephants are trained to sit on red boxes. One of the elephants 26 had escaped and when he saw the 27 little red car he promptly sat on 28 it! As you can imagine the car looked a mess. One side was squashed 29 badly / flat but it was still possible to drive. The manager assured 30 me that the circus would pay for the 31 damage. He couldn’t have been more apologetic.
The children were very 32 amused and giggled about the incident all the way home. 33 Just
/ But before we got there, we 34 passed the scene of a serious accident. About a mile 35 further on a policeman stopped us and asked if we’d 36 been involved in the accident. I wish I had a 37 picture of his face when I told him what had happened 38 to the car.
I think he wanted to arrest me for drunken driving! Fortunately the 39 children were there to back me up.
40 How are you managing without me? please don’t 41 forget to water my plants. I’m planning to leave here 42 at the end of the month.
My love to you all.
Mom.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
113
VU
Exercise 4 Multiple Choice Cloze
Here words are provided and you have to choose and write in each blank the word you think belongs there.
Over population is one of the most serious problems facing the world today. The world’s exploding population -----------------, even more growing pains --------------- for already
crowded areas. ---------------new United Nations study ------------- that by the year-----
five billion persons will -----------------added to the 6.5 in the world today. --------
----------more troubling than the-----------------number of inhabitants are --------------- estimate of where they will be concentrated.
(Advanced Reading Skills) aaaOAver population is one of the most serious p
Over population is one of the most serious problems facing the world today. The world’s exploding population experiences, signals, predicts, even more growing pains before, now, ahead for already crowded areas. The, Some, A new United Nations study signals, forecasts, tells that by the year 2000, 2001, 2015 five billion persons will have, be, not be added to the 6.5 billion, million, thousand in the world today. Even, Far, No more troubling than the big, small, increasing number of inhabitants is
an, the, estimate of where they will be Concentrated. (Advanced Reading Skills)
Markstein & Hirasawa
The world’s exploding population
Exercise 5 Inflectional Cloze
Here the inflectional endings of words are deleted. E.g. plural endings of nouns, past form of regular verbs, etc…This type of cloze is good for practicing grammar in a connected passage. e.g.
37
If there were a perfect robot, what would it be like? Imagine a able to wax the , wash the , and iron the ,not to mention the fact that it would be able to entertain, learn, and perform several other . What a timesaver a self-ambulatory robot would be. Who wouldn’t want to sit back and relax while a robot did the house chores?
aANIf there were a perfect robot, what would it be like? Imagine a machine able to If
If there were a perfect robot, what would it be like? Imagine a machine able to wax the car, wash the dishes and iron the clothes, not to mention the fact that it would be able to entertain, learn, and perform several other jobs. What a timesaver a self-ambulatory robot would be. Who wouldn’t want to sit back and relax while a robot did the house chores?
ere were a perfect robot, what would
If I were to design my own robot it would need to do more than just the everyday house
like making the and dusting the . First of all, it would need to be intellectual. It would need to be able to reason, understand, and carry out other of mental activity, such as helping me complete difficult math or proofreading my English for grammatical or spelling . Intellect would be the key quality of my personalized robot.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
114
VU
Exercise 6 Cloze with Phrases
This type requires phrases instead of single words to fill in the blanks which occur at random. This is a more difficult exercise and is used in the development of creativity in language use.
In the following passage there are blanks which may be filled with a word or a phrase. Insert the word or phrase that makes sense according to the meaning of the passage.
Oliver is a film about an orphan 1 . The story 2 Charles Dickens, the famous novelist. It 3 in England during the 4 . Oliver, 5 escapes from a workhouse and 6 London. 7 he meets the villian, Bill Sykes, and Nancy, his girl friend, the pickpocket, artful Dodger, and Fagin, the old beggar.
8 , the beggar and the pickpocket teach him 9 to survive, but then the police. 10 The judge lets him 11 with his uncle, Mr. Brown Low, a 12 man. 13 Bill Sykes is killed, and Oliver goes to 14 happily 15 uncle. It’s such an 16 and 17 story about a boy’s 18 for 19 that nobody should 20 .
Exercise 7 Cloze without Blanks
This is an advanced level exercise. Here a word is omitted from each line/sentence without a blank marked on the page. You are required to first mark the place where you think the word has been omitted with a stroke (/), and then write the word that has been omitted in the right hand margin. The first two have been done for you. There are ten insertions to be made.
A robot is a machine designed to do tasks usually / by people. …done...
Robots already do / jobs. | …many... |
They weld parts and spray paint in car | 1…... |
factories. They do dangerous work | 2…... |
as handling explosives. Some even | 3…... |
in space and under the ocean. | 4…... |
hard working machines usually | |
don’t have human shapes. If I | |
were to design my own robot, | |
it would need to do than just | 5…... |
household chores. My robot will be | 6…... |
a masterpiece, to perform almost | |
any task with agile precision. It will | |
be able to solve tough problems a | 7….. |
matter of seconds that would | |
normally human beings hours to | 8…... |
complete. It will use intelligence and | |
agility to perform numerous tasks. | |
My robot will be maid, my business | 9…... |
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
115
VU
partner and my library rolled into unique machine. There is but problem. How many decades until this ideal robot is actually built?
10….
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
116
VU
Lesson-18
Reading: Skimming and Scanning
In this lesson, we will be looking at a reading text which will talk about primary and secondary memory in a computer. We are following the same pattern as established earlier. You are required to listen carefully as I read the text and then together we will do the exercises that follow the reading passage.
Primary and Secondary memory[1] The term ‘memory’ is usually used to refer to the internal storage locations of a computer. It is also called real storage or primary memory, and is expressed as quantities of K. For example, computers are advertised as having memories of 16K or 152k, depending on their storage capacity. Each k is equal to 1,024 bytes, and each byte is equal to 8 bits.
These addresses are like the addresses of houses, in that they do not change. Because they are always fixed, the control unit knows where to find them at a very high speed. When it finds them, it puts into the compartments whatever must go there and wipes out whatever was stored there. The information present in these compartments is called the contents of the memory.
On the other hand, random-access devices are designed to permit direct, or almost direct, access to specified data. These devices bypass large quantities of irrelevant data and therefore reduce access time considerably. An example of this technology is the magnetic disk, which is faster than the magnetic tape and also more expensive.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
117
VU
When disks are hooked up to the computer and used as an extension of internal storage in order to increase the capacity of primary memory, this is called virtual storage. For example, a computer with 256K bytes of real storage may seem to have 512K bytes of virtual storage by using disks to provide additional storage.
1 Main idea:
Which statement best expresses the main idea of the text? Why did you eliminate the other choices?
Answer
Main idea of the passages
The text mentions that primary memory is very costly.
It doesn’t state that it is more important than secondary memory; neither does it state that the later is unimportant in a computer system.
2 Understanding the passage:
Indicate whether the following ideas were stated or not stated (S/NS) in the text.
S NS
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
118
VU
3 Locating Information
Find the passages in the text where the following ideas are expressed. Give the paragraph reference.
………. 1 Speed and random access are important in processing information.
………. 2 Random-access devices are more efficient than sequential devices.
………. 3 The CPU and primary memory work closely together.
………. 4 Virtual storage increases the memory capacity of a computer.
………. 5 Real storage, internal storage, and primary memory are all the same
………. 6 Information is stored in memory in compartments with a specific location.
………. 7 There are two classes of secondary memory device.
………. 8 Only parts of programs are kept in primary storage while a program is being run through.
Answer:
Find the passages in the text where the following ideas are expressed. Give the paragraph reference.
Para 2…….1 Speed and random access are important in processing information. Para 4…….2 Random-access devices are more efficient than sequential devices. Para 2…….3 The CPU and primary memory work closely together.
Para 4…….4 Virtual storage increases the memory capacity of a computer.
Para 1…….5 Real storage, internal storage, and primary memory are all the same
Para 2…….6 Information is stored in memory in compartments with a specific location. Para 4…….7 There are two classes of secondary memory device.
Para 3……8 Only parts of programs are kept in primary storage while a program is being run through.
Look back at the text and find out what the words in bold typeface refer to.
………...
………... storage capacity
Answer:
Contextual reference
Look back at the text and find out what the words in bold typeface refer to.
(p.1)… memory
……...
storage capacity
(p.1)… Memories computers
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
119
VU
3. Thus making them
(p.2)… Memories computers
4. The former means that
(p.2)… Random access
5 Understanding words
(p.2)… Primary memory
(p.2)… Compartment……
(p.2)… Address of houses…...
(p.2)… Addresses……. (p.2)…… Compartments….
(p.3)…… Program….
Refer back to the text and find synonyms for the following words.
………...
………...
………...
………...
………...
Answer:
Refer back to the text and find synonyms for the following words:
(p.1)… Expressed (p.2)… Wipes out (p.3)… Executed (p.4)… Preceding (p.4)… Considerably
Now refer back to the text and find antonyms for the following words.
| ………... ………... ………... ………... ………... | |
Answer: 6. Latter | | … former |
| | … permit … required … bypass … real |
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
120
VU
6 Word forms
First choose the appropriate form of the words to complete the sentences. Then check the differences of meaning in your dictionary.
6 Word forms (Answers)
First choose the appropriate form of the words to complete the sentences. Then check the differences of meaning in your dictionary.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
121
VU
7 Content Review:
Match the words in column A with the words or statements in column B.
Answers | Column A | Column B |
d | 1. Internal storage | a. means any part of memory can be read equally quickly |
f | 2. Real storage | b. the information contained in the storage locations |
a | 3. Random access | c. are storage locations in internal storage |
c | 4. addresses | d. refers to memory contained in the storage locations |
b | 5. Contents | e. hooking up secondary memory devices onto memory to increase their capacity |
g | 6.Sequential access | f. sometimes called primary memory |
e | 7. Virtual storage | g. information must be read from secondary memory devices in a fixed pattern |
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
122
VU
8 Focus review
We learnt in earlier lesson how to use examples to explain a point or to illustrate an idea in a given text. It is important to learn to differentiate between the idea and the illustration of the idea with examples. Writers often say explicitly which things are examples by using connectives like for example, such as, etc...
Complete the following table by referring back to the text on ‘Primary and Secondary Memory’, and locating connectives used for illustrations and examples.
9. Adding Information.
There are many reasons why people read, but in an academic setting, reading is primarily done to get information on a particular subject .It is important for the reader to understand the relationship between the information given and the information which preceded it. Often information is presented in such a way as to suggest a REINFORCEMENT of what has been said, or to show a SIMILARITY to what has been said before.
When writers give explanations about something, they usually offer examples to support their argument in favor of a particular viewpoint. They may choose to present the information
DEDUCTIVELY, in which case a generalization is given first and then examples are given in support of the general statement or principle .Other prefer to provide examples first, and then make the generalization .This form of presentation is INDUCTIVE Reinforcement
Similarity
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
123
VU
Lesson -19
Reading: Scanning and Language Functions
In today’s lesson you are going to read about types of memory to be found in a computer. We will follow the usual pattern of reading followed by comprehension exercises, scanning for information vocabulary exercise and content review exercises. This will be followed by exercises on how language functions operate in English.
Types of memory
(1) As mentioned previously, one of the most important characteristics of a computer is its capability of storing information in its memory long enough to process it. Not all computers have the same type of memory. In this section, three types of memory will be discussed: core memory, semiconductor memory (or chip), and bubble memory.
(2a].Each core represented a binary digit of either 0 or 1, depending on its state. Early computers had a capacity of around 80,000 bits; whereas now, it is not surprising to hear about computers with a memory capacity of millions of bits. This has been made possible by the advent of transistors and by the advances in the manufacture of miniaturized circuitry. As a result, mainframes have been reduced in both size and cost. Throughout the 1950s, 1960s and up to the mid-1970s, core memory dominated the market.
[3a].Moreover, the size of the components containing the circuitry can be considerably reduced, a step which has led to the introduction of both minis and micros. As a result, computers have become smaller, faster, and cheaper. There is one problem with semiconductor memory, however: when power is removed, information in the memory is lost-unlike core memory, which is capable of retaining information during a power failure. 4] Another development in the field of computer memories is bubble memory. The concept consists of creating a thin film of metallic alloys over the memory board. When this film is magnetized, it produces magnetic bubbles, the presence or absence of which represents one bit of information. These bubbles are extremely tiny, about 0.1 micrometers in diameter. [4a].Therefore, a magnetic bubble memory can store information at a greater density than existing memories, which makes it suitable for micros. Bubble memories are not
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
VU
expensive; consume little power, small in size, and highly reliable. There is probably a lot more to learn about them, and research in this field continues.
Main idea: 1
Which statement does not express the main idea of the text?
2 Understanding the passage:
Decide whether the following statements are true or false (T/F) by referring to the information in the text. Then make the necessary changes so that the false statements become true.
T
F
T
T
T
T F
124
10. Bubble memory doesn’t have very many advantages.
3. Locating information
Find the passages in the text where the following ideas are expressed. Give the line references.
…p1……….1. First there is core memory.
…p3……….2. Further to this development, chips evolved.
……p1…….3. There are three types of memory board.
……p3…….4. This consists of producing a thin film over a memory board.
……p4…….5. Then semiconductor memory was developed.
……p4…….6 There is still a lot to learn about this process.
……p2…….7. This is made up of thin wires and rings.
……p4…….8. Finally, bubble memory was invented.
4 Contextual reference:
Look back at the text and find out what the words in bold typeface refer to.
1. Long enough to process it (1.3)……….
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
125
VU
(1.12)……...
(1.6)………
(1.37)……...
(1.38)……….
5 Understanding words
Refer back to the text and find synonyms for the following words.
(1.1)…………mentioned... (1.2)…………...respective… (1.17)…………...advances…. (1.33)…………...retaining…. (1.42)…………...suitable…..
Now refer back to the text and find antonyms for the following words.
(1.1)…………...either or….. (1.2)…………...passed through…… (1.17)…………...reduced…..
(1.33)…………...creating….. (1.42)…………...consume…
6. Words forms
First choose the appropriate form of the words to complete the sentences. Then check the differences of meaning in your dictionary.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
126
VU
Para | Time Sequence Marker | Information | |
[2] | The computer | had memories up of a kind of grid of fine vertical and horizontal wires | |
[2] | computers | had a capacity of around 80,000 bits | |
[2] | whereas | it is not surprising to hear about computers with a memory capacity of millions of bits | |
[2] | | core memory dominated the market | |
[3] | | there was further development which revolutionized computer |
7. Content review
Use the information in the text on ‘Types of Memory’ to complete the table.
Type | Developed | Size | Composition | Memory Capacity |
1. | | Large | | 80,000 bits |
2. | | | Integrated circuits on non-metallic element | |
3. | | | | |
8. Focus review
Focus G Time sequence
Complete the following table by referring back to the text on ‘Types of Memory’.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
127
VU
| | field |
Focus I Adding information:
Complete the following sentences by referring back to the text on ‘Types of Memory’.
FOCUS J
Giving an explanation or a definition
In texts similar to those in this book, authors often give definitions to new or unfamiliar terms, or vocabulary items and concepts, or ideas specific to the subject being discussed. Not only are definitions given, but explanations are often supplied, either implicitly or explicitly, to avoid confusion in the mind of the reader.
1. Some expressions or markers used to define or explain a statement explicitly are:
‘Means’ by | We mean* |
‘Is taken to be’ by | Is meant* |
‘Denotes’ | In other words |
‘Refers’ to is defined as | That is (to say)* |
Examples
Examples
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
128
VU
Examples
Examples
Exercise 1
Study the following definitions. A definition usually includes all three parts: the term to be defined, the group it belongs to, and the characteristics which distinguish it form other members of the group.
TERM | GROUP | CHARACTERISTICS |
A core | is a ferrite ring | which is capable of being either magnetized or demagnetized |
Silicon | is a nonmetallic element | with semiconductor characteristics |
Now analyze the following definitions and identify the different parts by highlighting the term; by underlining the group once, and by underlining the characteristics twice.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
129
VU
In today’s lesson we read about types of memory to be found in a computer. We did comprehension exercises, scanning for information vocabulary exercise and content review exercises and we finally looked at how language functions operate in English.
With this we come to the end of the lesson.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
130
VU
Lesson -20
Reading: Classifying, Cause and Effect Relationship
In today’s lesson you are going to read about Steps in Problem Solving. We will follow the usual pattern of reading followed by comprehension exercises, scanning for information vocabulary exercise and content review exercises. This will be followed by exploring the Cause Effect Relationship between texts and working with language for Classifying in English.
Steps in Problem Solving:
Can a computer solve problems?
It is a machine that carries out the procedures which the programmer gives it. It is the programmer then who solves the problems. There are a few steps that one has to follow in problem solving:
Step 1: The programmer must define the problem clearly. This means that he or she has to determine, in a general way, how to solve the problem. Some problems are easy, while others take months of study. The programmer should always start by asking: ‘Do I understand the problem’.
Step 2: The programmer must formulate on algorithm, which is a straightforward sequence of steps of instructions used to solve the problem. Constructing an algorithm is the most important part of problem solving and is usually time-consuming. An algorithm can be described by a flowchart, which may be stated in terms of a sequence of precise sentences, or a block diagram. The latter is a diagrammatic representation of the sequence of events to be followed in solving the problem. The relationship between the events is shown by means of a connecting arrow. A block diagram can show if a process has to be repeated or if there are alternative routes to be taken.
Step 3: The programmer must translate the algorithm or flowchart into a computer program. To do so, he or she writes detailed instructions for the computer, using one of the many computer languages available following the exact sequence of the flowchart algorithm. The program is usually written on coding sheets which have a specific format drawn on them.
Step 4: The programmer must then keypunch the program, or give the coding sheets to the keypunch Operator to do it. The program is either punched on cards or entered into the computer at a terminal with a visual display unit.
Step 5: The program must then be tested. To do so, the computer operator puts the deck of cards in the card reader and presses the ‘read’ button. This transfers the information to the memory of the computer. Next, a printout shows if the program works or if it has errors (called bugs). If the programmer is using a terminal instead of cards to enter the instructions it is possible, with the aid of a few commands, to store the program in the memory of the computer and get a printout.
Step 6: The last step is to add the data to the program and run the job completely. The computer will then perform the calculations necessary to solve the problem. It will follow the instructions in the program to the minutest details. Therefore, one can say that the computer is a robot. It doesn’t think, but simply does what it is told.
Exercises
1. Main idea
131
VU
Which statement best express the main idea of the text? Why did you eliminate the other choices?
2. Understanding the passage
Decide whether the following statements are true or false (T/F) by referring to the information in the text. Then make the necessary changes so that the false statements become true.
F
3. Locating Information
Find the passages in the text where the following ideas are expressed. Give the paragraph references.
…P4….. 1.
…P3…… 2.
…P1…… 3.
…P6…… 4.
10. Does what it is told
(l.42)………computer…….
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
…P2……5.
Programs are usually written on certain lined forms.
A block diagram can show decisions with two different outcomes. The programmer is the one who solves the problems.
Even if the programmer is using a terminal instead of cards, it is possible to get permanent copy of his program.
Not all problems are of the same level of difficulty.
4. Contextual Reference
Look back at the text and find out what the words in bold typeface refer to.
(l.1)…computer……….. (l.2)…procedure…..…. (l.3)…programmer.….. (l.14)…flow chart……. (l.15)…blocked diagram…….… (l.27)…key punch the program (l.32)…reading cards through card
(l.33)…………program…. (l.40)………computer…….
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
132
VU
5. Understanding Words
Refer back to the text and find synonyms for the following words.
a. …………print……………… your name and address
in block letters.
(1.15)…………precise………… (l.34) ………………bugs…… (l.35)………………aids…….
Now refer back to the text and find antonyms for the following words.
(l.5)………clearly………….. (l.6)……general…………….. (l.39)………completely…………
6. Word forms
First choose the appropriate form of the words to complete the sentences. Then check the differences of meaning in your dictionary.
Procedure, proceed, proceeding
2. Program, programmer, programmed, programming
4. Code, coding
5. Printer, Printing, Print, Printed
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
VU
7a. Content Review
Try to think of a definition for each of these items before checking them in the Glossary. Then complete the following statements with the appropriate words. Make sure you use the correct form, i.e. singular or plural.
Algorithm | coding sheets | flowchart |
Robot | printout | bugs |
…robot…………..
7b. Control review
Solving a problem is a process involving various steps. Complete the following diagram to show the sequence of these steps. Copy slide 44
Ccccccc Define the Problem Clearly
formulate an algorithm flowchart
translate the
8. Focus Review
Focus On: Cause and effect/result
The following sentences were taken from the text on ‘Steps in Problem Solving’. While reading these sentences underline the cause once, the effect/result twice, then circle the causal-effect/result marker.
Therefore, one can say that the computer is a robot.
Classifying
133
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
134
VU
The term ‘classification’ means to separate objects from one another. The simplest classification divides things into those that show groups of characteristics that are shared and those that are not. For example, one would not place fish and birds together in the same class with trees. Classification usually goes from general to specific and is essential in attempting to make sense out of things around us.
Classification, then, is a process of bringing order out of confusion by breaking down the general topic into its related parts in a logical way. Outlining is very closely related to classification, because it organizes information in a logical fashion, going from general to specific, or from least important to most important, or from specific to general.
1: From general to specific
There are several ways to expressing each of these relationships. By focusing on the large or high-level category and talking about its parts, that is, from general to specific, the following expressions can be used:
is | is made up of |
can be divided into | is composed of |
is of | comprises |
has includes | consists of |
A general to specific classification will usually have singular main verbs, unless two or more things are being analyzed simultaneously.
Examples
2. From specific to general:
A specific to general classification, what the smaller (or lower-level) components make when they are put together, usually has the following expressions:
are…. of make up form
constitute may be can be
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
135
VU
A specific to general classification will have plural verbs, because two or more lower-level categories are the focus of classification.
Examples:
6.
N.B The active/passive pairs such as made up and make up are not interchangeable.
Example:
The CPU is made up of the control unit, the arithmetic-logical unit and memory (from general to specific).
Not: ‘The CPU makes up the control unit, the arithmetic-logical unit, and memory.’
Not: ‘The control unit, the arithmetic-logical unit, and memory are made up of the CPU.’ Finally, understanding classification is important for understanding and recognizing definitions.
A computer has four basic components: input, processor, memory, and output. The CPU consists of two parts: the …………control unit…………. which directs and controls the signals and commands inside the processor, and the ………arithmetic-logical…………... unit which does the arithmetic operations and the decision-making operations. While the
…control unit………….….……is made up of a ………register…….……., a
………decoder…………., a……counter………………. and a…………clock……………, the …ALU………………….. is composed of ……registers………….., a………binary adders…………. and …circuitry……………..,which compares information and makes decision based on the results of the comparisons.
In a computer, internal memory or ……primary memory……………… refers to the storage location inside the computer, whereas………secondary memory……………. refers to the storage embodied in the peripherals…………core……….. can be divided into three types:……chip……………………., ………………… and ………bubble………… on the other hand may be grouped as ……secondary memory………… (………………) or
……sequential…………….. (…………….).
The …………tape ……………. devices can be either a ………random access………., a
…………disk………, a……input………. or a …card reader………………..These devices enter the information into the computer. After the processor has operated on it, the …tape drive…………………. devices display the results of the computations on either a
……………disk drive……… or a ……terminal…... or store them on tape or disk for future use.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
136
VU
These devices enter the information into the computer. After the processor has operated on it, the ……………output………. devices display the results of the computations on either a
………printer…………… or a …terminal…... or store them on tape or disk for future use.
Exercise 2
Using the diagram below, complete the paragraph that follows. Copy from slide 64
A computer system
CPU
A computer has four basic Components: input, processor, memory, and output. The CPU consists of two parts: the which directs and controls the signals and commands inside the processor, and the unit which does the arithmetic operations and the decision making operations. While the is made up of a a , a
, and a ,the is composed of , a
and , which compares information and makes decisions based on the results of the comparisons.
In a Computer internal memory or refers to the storage locations inside the computer, whereas refers to the storage embodied in the peripherals can be divided into three types: , and .
on the other hand may be grouped as ( ) or (
).
The devices can be either a , a , a or a
.
These Devices enter in information into the computer. After the processor has operated on it, the devices display the results of the computations on either a or a
, or store them on tape or disk for future use.
Answer:
A computer has four basic components: input,
Processor, memory, and output. The CPU consists of two parts: the Control unit which directs and controls the signals and commands inside the processor, and the arithmetic- logical which does the arithmetic operations and the decision making operations. While the Control unit is made up of a register, a decoder, a counter, and a clock, the_ ALU_ is composed of registers, a binary adder and Circuitry, which compares information and makes decisions based on the results of the comparisons.
In a computer, internal memory or primary memory refers to the storage locations inside the computer, whereas secondary memory refers to the storage embodied in the peripherals. Primary memory can be divided into three types: core, chip and bubble.
or
Secondary memory, on the other hand, may be grouped as sequential ( tape ) random access ( disk ).
The input devices can be either a card reader, a tape drive, a disk drive or a terminal.
These devices enter information into the computer. After the processor has operated on it, the output devices display the results of the computations on either a printer or a terminal, or store them on tape or disk for future use.
In today’s lesson you read about steps in Problem Solving. We followed the usual pattern of reading followed by comprehension exercises, scanning for information vocabulary
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
137
VU
exercise and content review exercises. This was followed by exploring the Cause Effect Relationship between texts and working with language for Classifying in English.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
138
VU
Lesson -21
Reading: Presenting Information Graphically
In this lesson, we will read about presenting information graphically through a flowchart. We will do exercises based on flow charts and read about constructing flow charts.
Flowcharting:
So far we have dealt mainly with computers, but now it is imperative that we find out how a program is written. In all activities involving computers, it is necessary that the programmer is aware of what the machine is doing and what a program is supposed to do. As previously mentioned flowcharting, one of the steps in programming, indicates the logical path the computer will follow in executing a program; it is a drawing very much like a road map. Flowcharting is not restricted to the preparation of program sin a particular language and should be done for each major problem before the writing of the program is attempted.
If the finished program does not run as it should, the errors are more easily detected on the flowchart than in the maze of words, characters, and numbers that make up the computer program. In order to develop a flowchart successfully, a programmer should be aware of the sequence of steps needed to obtain a correct solution to a problem.
There are two ways of making a flowchart: the freehand version and the neater, more readable version. In the former version, the graphic outlines are simply jotted down as the steps of the program are worked out. This is quite satisfactory if the flowchart is not intended to be kept as a permanent record. However, if a permanent, neater and more readable flowchart is needed, the latter method whereby a template, a sheet of plastic with all the flowcharting symbols cut into it is used.
The following symbols should be used for the purpose of uniformity. The first and last symbol is .
This is terminal symbol which indicates the beginning or the end of a program.
The word ‘START’ must be inserted inside the figure if it is the beginning of the program and ‘STOP’ if it is the end of the program.
The figure in the form of a parallelogram is used as an input/output symbol. It indicates that something is either brought to or taken form the program. The rectangular symbol stands for processing and indicates a place in the program where action is taken. In a program, to indicate that a decision has to be made, the diamond shaped symbol is used. The decision is usually in the form of a question that must be answered by either ‘yes’ or ‘no’. Finally, the arrows are used to show that the flow or direction in which the different actions in the program are performed.
It should be noted that flowchart is not a program, but only a step in the preparation of a program, and is used in determining how to step up and write the program. However, if the problem is not understood, neither the flowchart nor the program can be done correctly. It is possible for two programmers working separately; to write programs to solve the same problem and come up with flowcharts and programs that may be altogether different.
After a program has been worked out, it is usually written down and kept with a copy of the flowchart along with detailed instructions for the used and interpretation of the program. This procedure is part of what is referred to as program documentation. If documentation isn’t available, it is always possible to work backwards and make a flowchart from an application program. It may be necessary to create a new flowchart when the original one is
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
VU
missing, in order to understand the program for which it was a preparatory step. Flowcharting is one of the first things a student programmer is taught, because a flowchart shows how a person thinks about a problem. In other words it is through this that a new programmer reveals his or her logical and analytical ability, which is a must in programming.
Exercises
Which statement expresses the main idea of the text? Why did you eliminate the other choices?
2. Understanding the Passage
Decide whether the following statements are true or false (T/F) by referring to the information in the text. Then make the necessary changes so that the false statements become true.
Answer:
T
139
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
140
VU
F
/
3. Locating Information
……….. 1. A programmer must document his program in order that others may be able to understand it.
……….. 2. Flowcharting resembles a map.
……….. 3. Flowcharting shows the logical ability of a programmer.
……….. 4. There is more than one way of flowcharting.
……….. 5. A certain symbol is used to indicate if a question is to be answered ‘yes’ or ‘no’.
Answers:
…P5... 1. A programmer must document his program in order that others may be able to understand it.
…P1... 2. Flowcharting resembles a map.
…P6... 3Flowcharting shows the logical ability of a programmer.
…P2... 4. There is more than one way of flowcharting.
…P3... 5. A certain symbol is used to indicate if a question is to be answered ‘yes’ or ‘no’.
4. Contextual Reference
Look back at the text and find out what the words in bold typeface refer to.
(l.10)……………….
(l.16)……………….
(l.18)……………….
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
141
VU
(l.20)…….………… (l.21)……………… (l.23)……………… (l.27)………………. (l.40)……………….different (l.48)………………
10. Which is a must in programming (l.53)………………
Answer:
(l.10)………program…. (l.16)…………freehand version….
(l.18)……… graphic jotting down outlines ………. (l.20)…….…neater readable version… (l.21)………………sheet of plastic used…. (l.23)…………symbol… (l.27)……………….figure…. (l.40)……………….flow chart and program… (l.48)……………flowchart…
10. Which is a must in programming (l.53)……… logical analytical ability …
5. Understanding Words
Refer back to the text and find synonyms for the following words.
(l.6) …………………… (1.9)…………………… (l.14)…………………..
(l.25)…………………..
(l.52)…………………..
Now refer back to the text and find antonyms for the following words.
(l.7) …………………… (1.11)…………………… (l.19)…………………..
(l.45)…………………..
(l.53)…………………..
6. Word forms
First choose the appropriate form of the words to complete the sentence. Then check the differences of meaning in your dictionary.
2. Correction, correct, corrected, corrective, correcting
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
142
VU
4. Performance, perform, performed, performing, performer
a……………………….. is a verb used quite often in COBOL programming.
b. Data processing refers to the operations which are …………………….. on the data either to derive information from them or to order them in files.
c. The …………………… of the computer salesman was measured by the number of units he sold.
7a Content Review
Try to think of a definition for each of these items before checking them in the Glossary. Then complete the following statements with the appropriate words. Make sure you use the correct form, i.e. singular or plural.
Executing | Terminal | Rectangle |
Template | Parallelogram | Diamond |
Documentation | | |
7b .Content Review
Problem 1
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
143
VU
Study the following flowchart, which shows the procedure followed in calculating an employee’s salary.
In the following paragraph based on the flowchart above, fill in the blanks with the proper connectives. Use these words: but, that is, then, if, to begin with, after, first, finally, next, before, in other words.
In calculating an employee’s salary, a computer must go through a number of operations in a logical manner. ………………..it must read the number of hours worked and the rate of pay for each hour worked. ………………………….. it must calculate the gross salary;
………………… multiply the hours work by the rate of pay for each hour worked…………...doing these two operations it must find out whether the employee has worked overtime or not.
8. Focus Review
Focus on: Cause and Effect
Read again ‘Flowcharting’ to complete the table below
Making predictions:
A prediction is a statement about a particular subject which is related to a prior condition being fulfilled. It is a special kind of inference in which we tell in advance what we think will happen in the future. It is therefore impossible to predict without having any knowledge of an existing condition.
By examining existing data, a logical conclusion can often be logically drawn about what is likely to happen next. Predictions of results based on existing conditions can be expressed
PARA CAUSE
EFFECT
The errors are more easily detected on the flow chart
(1)
If the finished program does not run as it should
If the flowchart is not intended to be kept as a permanent record
If a permanent, neater and more readable flowchart is needed
(2)
This is quite satisfactory
(3)
The word ‘start’ must be inserting
If it is the end of the program
(4)
Neither the flowchart nor the program can be done correctly
(5)
If documentation isn’t available
(6)
Flowcharting is one of the first things a student programmer is taught
The latter method is used
If it is the beginning of the program
inside the figure
‘Stop’ must be inserted inside the figure
If the problem is not understood
It is always possible to work background
Because a flowchart shows how a person thinks about a problem
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
144
VU
as different levels of certainty. They are not absolute, and can change according to context. For example
Will (definitely, certainly) Certain, sure
Without a doubt, without question
Like (75%)
Most probable, most probably, Highly probable, most likely, Highly likely (90%)
May (not), might (not) can, Could, possible, possibly, Perhaps
Doubtful, questionable (25%)
Probably not (25%) Most/highly improbable Unlikely (10%) Most/highly doubtful Questionable (10%) Most probably not 10%
a. present or future
Cannot, could not
Not possible, impossible
b.
past Could not
Not possible, impossible
When a necessary condition exists in process, the following expressions are used:
For Y to occur/happen/take place {x must be present or there must be Y ,Y depends on X} In a condition-prediction relationship, the statement of condition is preceded by ‘if’; no matter to what degree of certainty the prediction is expressed.
Also the verb tenses are important to note because a distinction between the statements of condition which is made in the present must relate to the events of the prediction which will happen in the future.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
145
VU
Example
1. At the rate computer technology is growing, today’s computers might be obsolete by 2005and most certainly by 2010.
CONDITION | PREDICTION |
At the rate computer technology is growing | today’s computers might be obsolete by 2005 and most certainly by 2010 |
2. If we couldn’t feed information in and get results back, computers wouldn’t be of much use:
CONDITION | PREDICTION |
If we couldn’t feed information in and get results back, | computers wouldn’t be of much use |
3. If the hammer in drum printers hits a little early or late, the characters will appear slightly above or below the line.
CONDITION | PREDICTION |
If the hammer in drum Printers hits a little early or late, | the characters will appear slightly above or below the line |
Exercise:
Read the following sentences and underline the part that expresses a condition, once; and the part expressing a prediction, twice.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
146
VU
5. If computer technology continues growing at the rate it has, bubble memory will soon replace the chip.
In today’s lesson we read about flowcharting.
In today’s lesson we read about flowcharting followed by comprehension exercises, scanning for information vocabulary exercise and content review exercises. We explored through exercises the relationship between Cause and Effect. Finally we looked at how to make predictions, what language to use for making predictions.
With this we come to the end.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
147
VU
Lesson -22
THE COMPOUND - COMPLEX Writing: Sentence Types
Until now the focus of our lessons has been on the development of your reading comprehension skills but now the focus will shift to writing of sentences and paragraphs and grammar. In today’s lesson we will look at different sentence types.
Sentence Types:
Despite the wide availability and use of computers, word processors and electronic communication devices, most of us still communicate with one another by exchanging written and spoken words. And we naturally want to express ourselves as well as possible. We want to be able to communicate our thoughts to others accurately, convincingly, and of course, gracefully.
Thinking, speaking and writing are closely related to each other. If you are familiar with the essential rules of good English and think clearly, you will speak and write with confidence - the confidence that comes from a sense of having mastered the rules and conventions which must be followed in all acceptable writing.
2You as a student interested in writing in English will have to learn and master these rules and conventions if you are to communicate your thoughts successfully. These rules and standards are important. Until you have grasped them well, you will be handicapped, for you will lack the tools of the craft of writing.
Remember, writing does not come of itself. It is a skill, a learned skill. It’s a specialized skill which needs a lot of practice. Writing in a foreign language is not easy, even native speakers found it extremely difficult to express themselves, and for foreign learners of English like you and me, it is all the more difficult. But with knowledge and practice one can learn to write well. Good writing depends on knowledge of three things:
Grammar: deals with the parts of speech, with the variations in the form of words when used in different constructions, and with the relationship between different words within the sentence (syntax). You will also discover that the rules of grammar are quite definite and at the same time you will find that under certain circumstances, a form of a word is correct and other forms are incorrect grammar. Grammar concerns all the rules of language use. It classifies words into all sorts of categories and describes the peculiarities of each category. Grammar has many categories and specifies each category by a term or name which enables us to recognize it. The English language has 8 parts of speech – the different kinds of words used for different purposes in a sentence. You are familiar with the 8 parts of English speech – Noun Verb Pronoun, Adjective, Adverb, Proposition, Conjunction, and Interjection. In addition to the 8 parts of speech there are other terms that you must become familiar with in order to understand and write effective sentences. There are 4 kinds of words that are two parts of speech combined into one, these are: participle, gerund, infinitive and relative adverb.most of us still communicate with one
another by exchanging written an today’s lesson we
148
VU
1. Participle:
It is a verb and adjective combined e.g. The retired headmaster distributed the prizes.
Gerund: is a verb and noun combined; e.g. She is thinking of leaving her job.
Infinitive: is also a verb and noun combined. e.g. She wishes to deposit the money. Relative Adverb: is partly an adverb and partly a conjunction e.g. I was relieved when the program ended. Besides knowledge of grammar, the other two things required for good writing are Rhetoric which deals with the choice of words and their effective arrangement and Composition, which is ‘putting together’ of parts to form a whole: words into sentences, sentences into paragraphs and paragraphs into longer units. This arrangement is essential to all writing.
The rules of rhetoric and composition, which are less rigid than the rules of grammar, provide the standards of good writing. Remember these rules of good English are the result of generations of experiments in the art of using words for communication.
Even messages composed on word processors, for instance, are texts constructed of words and sentences according to the rules and usages of English grammar, spelling and punctuation.
Writing then is a means of communication as well as self expression. In most cases, students are capable of communicating their ideas, knowledge, experiences and opinions. But almost everyone, no matter how accomplished in communicating with others can benefit from help or advice in improving his/her communication skills.
The tools of writing are
Having said that I would like to remind you that good writing depends upon more than grammatical correctness, Sentences, paragraphs and longer compositions may follow grammatical rules accurately and may still not be effective. Ability to write well comes down to how well you construct sentences. You can have the cleverest of ideas but if you have no control over your sentences the results will be disappointing.
Control over sentences means the ability to employ different kinds of sentence patterns or forms. Our students are generally weak in sentence structure. In the coming weeks you shall have practice in sentence construction. A sentence is a group of words containing a subject (Noun or Noun equivalent) and a verb (action or state of being) in which something is expressed about something else. The sentence is the equivalent in words of the complete thought from your mind, and it is with sentences i.e. complete thoughts that we compose paragraphs from which we construct essays, letters, reports, books, etc….
In order to write well you must be able to construct good, effective sentences. In today’s lesson you will learn about types of sentences and have practice in all types of sentences. Sentences can be classified according to the way they are constructed and according to their purpose / meaning. We will first consider sentences according to their meaning / purpose.
To make a statement, assertion or declaration:
e.g. He is a teacher. It is cloudy.
b. To ask a question. e.g. What day is it?
c. To issue commands. e.g. Go in
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
VU
d. To utter exclamations. e.g. If only it would stop raining!
e. To offer greetings and other expressions which have no definite forms: e.g. Good morning. Hello. Shut-up.
II Sentences may be also classified according to their structure, which is determined by the kind and number of clauses / statements in them. Depending upon how it is constructed, sentences in English are either simple, compound, complex or compound - complex. So we can say these are the four most basic kinds of sentences in English. We need to distinguish these four kinds of sentences from each other.
The Simple Sentence:
(a) Any sentence, however long or short, that has only one subject - verb combination and expresses a complete thought is a simple sentence consisting of one subject and one verb.
a) - Sparks fly upwards. (3)
- The tired, dirty and footsore tourists, straggled wearily across the bridge, up the hill, and finally into the rest house. (20)
The second sentence contains 20 words, but, because it has one subject (tourists) and one finite verb (straggled), it is classified as a simple sentence.
b) A simple sentence may have more than one subject. e.g.
- Lamb and Hazlitt wrote charming essays.
-Towels and bed sheets sway on the clothesline.
The Simple Sentence:
a) e.g. - Sparks fly upwards. (3)
- The tired, dirty and footsore tourists, straggled wearily across the bridge, up the hill, and finally into the rest house. (20)
-Towels and bed sheets sway on the clothesline.
- The children splashed and squealed in the stream.
- They were born in the same year, 1950, attended the same university and wrote for the same newspaper.
d) A simple sentence may even have several subjects and verbs. e.g.
- Every Saturday night, Shama, Salman and Minko go to the movies, eat at a Chinese restaurant and play cards at the gymkhana club. (3 subjects & 3 verbs)
Practice 1:
Complete the simple sentences by filling in one or more subjects and one or more verbs.
- Saima wants biryani for dinner, but she forgot to buy meat.
-His life was not an easy one, nor was it eventful.
Joining Words The following table explains all the joining words. and means in addition
149
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
150
VU
but so for yet or nor
-
-
-
-
however as a result because however
is used to show alternatives
is used to show a second negative statement
Look at the following uses of the joining / co-coordinating words.
- She works at home, for she wants to be with her two young children- My friend loves sewing, yet she decided to take to take up science in college.- You can ride with us to the stadium, or you can go with someone else.
- Saad does not eat meat, nor does he eat fish.
Practice 2:
Use a comma and a suitable joining word to combine each pair of simple sentences into a compound sentence. Choose from the following joining words.
And but so
A complex sentence on the other hand, includes one independent statement (clause) and at least one dependent statement, which cannot stand alone, e.g.
- When the century began, there were many noun coffee houses in the city (adverbial).
- Men who wanted to meet their friends visited these shops (adjectival)
-We know that these gatherings led eventually to the formation of a new political party.
(Noun).
The second statement in the sentence is independent. It can stand alone as a simple sentence: there were many coffee houses in the city. The first statement, however, cannot stand alone. It is dependent - it depends on the rest of the sentence to complete the thought. There are several ways in which a dependent statement (clause) may be used in a sentence - adverbial, adjectival, noun.
- When the century began, there were many coffee houses in the city (adverbial).
- Men who wanted to meet their friends visited these shops (adjectival).
-We know that these gatherings led eventually to the formation of a new political party.
(Noun)
- When the century began, there were many coffee houses in the city (adverbial).
- Men who wanted to meet their friends visited these shops (adjectival).
-We know that these gatherings led eventually to the formation of a new political party.
(Noun).
Dependent statements also begin with dependent words, such as although. They also include a subject and a verb. e. g. In the sentence:
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
151
VU
Although many nearby trees were uprooted, our house escaped the storm, (the subject of the dependent statement is trees, the verb is “were uprooted”).
Now look at another sentence:
-As the mad man made demands on the phone, police surrounded the building.
-Although many nearby trees were uprooted, our house escaped the storm.
-As the mad man made demands on the phone, police surrounded the building.
This is also a complex sentence: one part can stand independently as a simple sentence: Police surrounded the building. The other part of the sentence has a subject and a verb, but it begins with a dependent word and cannot stand alone: As the mad man made demands on the phone.
Here’s another complex sentence. See if you can spot the independent and dependent parts of the sentence
- Ghazala will not sell her old gramophone even if she is offered a large sum of money. Ghazala will not sell her old gramophone even if she is offered a large sum of money.
DEPENDENT WORDS: In the example you have seen, the words although, as, and even if introduce statements that are dependent. There are various other dependent words also known as subordinating conjunctions. Look at the previous examples again to understand how to punctuate complex sentences.
-Ghazala will not sell her old gramophone even if she is offered a large sum of money.
Punctuate
-Ghazala will not sell her old gramophone even if she is offered a large sum of money.
List of some dependent words
After | even | |
If | unless | where |
Although | even | |
Though | until | wherever |
As | if | when |
Whether | | |
Because | since | whenever |
While | | |
Before | though | |
Practice 3
Complete the following statements then underline the dependent statement/clause. Remember every dependent should have a subject and a verb.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
152
VU
Practice 4: Combine the first two sentences into one sentence, and combine the last two sentences into another sentence. Use any of the following joining words and dependent words.
Joining Words: Dependent Words:
and, but, so
after, although, because, when
1. It had rained for many days. The sum finally came out. The children wanted a picnic. The ground was too wet.
2.
The teacher was late to class. The classroom was quiet anyway
The students were reading their text books They were taking an important test that day.
great shout of relief arose when the rescuers finally appeared.
49
50
. 51
Practice 4: Combine the first two sentences into one sentence, and combine the last two sentences into another sentence. Use any of the following joining words and dependent words.
Joining Words and, but, so
Dependent Words after, although, because, when
(Use after to combine the first 2 sentences.)
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
153
VU
The classroom was quiet anyway.
The students were reading their text books. They were taking an important test that day. (Use although to combine the first 2 sentences.) (Use because to combine the last 2 sentences.)
SENTENCE
Compound Complex sentences consist of a compound sentence (two or more independent statements/clauses) and at least one dependent statement /clause. The following sentences are samples of compound - complex sentences:
great shout of relief arose when the rescuers finally appeared.
Lesson Review:
5. Which sentence is a complex sentence?
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
154
VU
In today’s lesson we worked on different sentence types. We looked at different kinds of sentences and what makes them different. I hope you would be able to recognize sentences as simple, compound and complex sentences. Moreover, that it will help you construct more effective sentences.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
155
VU
Lesson -23
Writing: Effective Sentences: Unity, Coherence, And Emphasis
We looked at different kinds of sentences in the last lesson, simple, compound and complex. In this lesson, we will focus on writing effective sentences by looking at issues like the unity of a sentence and the emphasis in a sentence.
Effective Sentences
What is it that makes sentences effective?
There are three elements which make for effectiveness in sentences: unity, coherence and emphasis.
I. Unity: A good sentence should have unity, that is, it must express one main idea. Although a sentence may contain more than one fact, all the facts must relate to the main idea. E.g. the models were all dressed in the latest fashions and many of them are unemployed. This sentence does not have unity. The first clause tells us about the model’s clothing, e.g. the models were all dressed in the latest fashions and many of them are unemployed. While the second one mentions unemployment; the two different ideas don’t belong to one another in one sentence. They should be stated in two separate sentences. This sentence is a sample of a sentence that lacks unity. Unity is violated in five ways:
thought of the sentence e.g. Reading his daily newspaper that morning, standing at the crowded bus stop, the morning sun just lighting up the tops of the high buildings and making the sleepy-eyed people shade their eyes, made a great impression on me.
EXAMPLES
i. The students at the college use a great deal of abusive language and they are from all parts of the country.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
156
VU
ii.Reading his daily newspaper that morning, standing at the crowded bus stop, the morning sun just lighting up the tops of the high buildings and making the sleepy-eyed people shade their eyes, made a great impression on me.
All these expressions can be improved by adding a clause or substituting another word for such, so and too. e.g.
This is such a heavy chair that it is not easy to carry.
I was so pleased about the letter that I ran to tell my mother.
The news is too wonderful to be believed. / The news is indeed wonderful.
Some clauses express complete thoughts and others do not. Those that express complete thoughts are independent or main clauses, others are called dependent or subordinate clauses. Now if a sentence contains not one single thought but a complete thought containing a number of constituent thoughts, then you have to decide which of the several ideas is the main idea and which ideas are subordinate and then so construct the sentence that the subordinate thoughts will give emphasis to the main thought.
When you place the principal or main thought in a subordinate position unity of the sentence is destroyed.
(Faulty) The fielder in the slips dropped the third catch, when the match was definitely lost.
(Improved) When the fielder in the slips dropped the third catch the match was definitely lost.
The fielder in the slips dropped the third catch, when the match was definitely lost (Faulty)
Consider these statements:
He was born of poor parents. He was obliged to work his way through college. He graduated with honors at the heads of his class.
Two of these statements may be subordinated to the third.
Although he was born of poor parents and was obliged to work his way through college, he graduated with honours at the head of his class.
He was born of poor parents. He was obliged to work his way through college. He graduated with honours at the heads of his class.
Practice 1:
The following sentences can be improved by using the correct connectives and making the subordinate thoughts give emphasis to the main thought.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
VU
Practice 2:
The following sentences are lacking in unity. Improve them by adding details & changing words where necessary.
We have seen that less important ideas must be made subordinate to the main idea of a sentence. However, if two ideas are co-ordinate, they must be given equal rank in the sentence. This is known as parallelism. Students very often use faulty parallelism. Great care must be used in the matter of parallel structure. Nouns must be parallel to nouns, verbs to verbs, subordinate clauses to subordinate clauses gerunds to gerunds, etc…..
The following sentences are examples of faulty constructions.
NOTE :(1) It is often necessary to repeat preposition or other words in order to make parallelism clear. e.g. For lunch I had an apple pie and banana.
(Improved) For lunch I had an apple pie and a banana.
(2) Correlatives (either…or / not only…also) should be used only with parallel elements. He not only likes tennis but also golf.
(Improved) He not only likes tennis but also golf.
You must bear in mind that faulty parallelism is worse than no parallelism at all. You should use parallelism freely in your sentences but should resist all temptation to force into parallel structure clauses which are not parallel in thought.
Practice 3:
The following sentences contain errors in parallelism. Correct the errors.
157
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
158
VU
6. The boy’s face was streaked with dirt and his feet muddy.
Correct handling of matters of unity, parallelism and subordination contributes to coherence. When working for coherence there are 4 pitfalls which must be avoided at all costs. These are weak, general or ambiguous reference of pronouns, split constructions, use of mixed constructions and mixed figures of speech and needless shifting from one point of view to another – all these destroy coherence in a sentence.
Note: Don’t treat an antecedent first as singular and then as plural. e.g.
2. Split Constructions: e.g.
3(a). Bad construction
(b). Mixture of figures of speech e.g. My castles in air came tumbling down into a bottomless heap.
4. Aimless shifting from one point of view another will destroy coherence in a sentence.
This can be due to a needless shift from
For Example
(Active to passive) (Singular to plural)
(iii) The only words that we were able to distinguish are ‘horse’ and ‘cart’.
(Past to present)
Practice 4:
The following sentences lack coherence. Try to make them better.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
159
VU
III. Emphasis.
(a) Position: e.g.
During his long stay with the club he served as president, secretary, treasurer and vice president.
(i) I have never seen anything like it in my life. (Natural Order)
Practice 5:
The following sentences can be made more emphatic.
In today's lesson we considered the general elements - unity coherence and emphasis which make for effectiveness in sentences. We shall continue with sentence construction in the next few lessons
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
160
VU
Lesson -24
Writing: Identifying Sentence Errors
In earlier lessons we have been exploring ways of writing more effective sentences. In this lesson, we will look at the errors we all make and how to revise these errors.
Sentence Errors to be Avoided:
Having considered the general elements which make for effectiveness in sentences, we will now take up four common errors in sentence construction. These errors should be avoided by all who write in English. These errors are:
i Sentence Fragments ii Run-on sentences
(a) Fused sentences (b) comma splice iii Misplaced and Dangling Modifiers
Sentence Fragments
We said that a sentence is a group of words that must contain a subject and a verb. It must also express one complete thought. Therefore a number of ideas must not be huddled together in a simple unit. Now a sentence fragment, as the phrase tells you, is less than a sentence - it is a fragment because it lacks a subject or a verb or because it does not express a complete thought. The following are samples of fragments.
- My neighbour being a typical businessman who prides himself on his efficiency.
- Because there are two computers on his desk.
The writer of these incomplete statements apparently forgot that a sentence must express a complete thought. You might say that professional writers-novelists, short story writers use incomplete sentences, but if you look closely you will see that their fragments convey complete thoughts and they convey them immediately
I. Dependent Word Fragments
Some fragments contain a subject and a verb, but they do not express a complete thought e.g.
When the postman arrived, we handed him the letters.
There was loud knocking on the front door after I had switched off the light
Practice1
Identify the part you think is not a complete sentence.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
VU
Practice 2:
This practice will give you a sense of the difference between a dependent-word fragment and a complete sentence. Turn each fragment into a sentence by adding a statement that completes the thought.
II. -Ing and To Fragments
(a) When a word ending in -ing appears at the beginning of a group of words a fragment may result. e.g.
- Hoping to buy things cheaply. Poor people often go the Sunday bazaars.Here the second statement is a complete sentence. But the first group of words lacks both a subject and a verb, so it is a fragment.
(b) Here is an example of a ‘to’ fragment.
- The ladies jogged through the park. To lose weight. There are two ways to correct -ing and to fragments.
things cheaply.- The ladies jogged through the park. They wanted to lose weight. Hoping to buy things cheaply, poor people often go to the Sunday bazaar.
161
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
162
VU
-Poor people often to the Sunday bazaar. They hope to buy things cheaply.
- The ladies jogged through the park. They wanted to lose weight
Practice 3:
First identify the -ing or to fragment in each of the following items. Then rewrite the correct version using one of the two methods just discussed.
1- Police officers stood all over the road. Directing traffic around the accident.
1- Police officers stood all over the road. Directing traffic around the accident.
- Police officers stood all over the road, directing traffic around the accident.
2. Rising high into the sky. The huge yellow kite could be seen for miles.
- Rising high into the sky, the huge yellow kite could be seen for miles.
3. Sarah painted a landscape. To enter the contest.
- Sarah painted a landscape. She wanted to enter the contest.
4. To get off the diving board. The swimmer did a somersault.
-The swimmer wanted to get off the diving board. He did a somersault.
III. Added-Detail Fragment-
Another common kind of fragment begins with one of the following words: like, including, such as, for example, for instance, except, without, especially, and also. All these words introduce an additional point or example to what has already been stated. e.g.
In each of these examples, the second word group lacks both a subject and a verb. Note that each of these fragments begins with an Added Detail word or phrase: except and including. To correct an Added Detail fragment you follow the same two methods as used for the last type of fragment -ing and to fragments.
Practice 4
Identify the added - detail fragment in each of the following items then write the correct version using one of the two methods given earlier.
1-The former playmates walked past one another without saying a word.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
163
VU
2-For a main dish, I often serve meat and vegetables. For example, I mix fish with spinach. 3- The policeman searched the room for clues such as old photographs, old letters and old receipts.
4- Oranges are full of nutrients especially vitamin C.
IV. Missing - Subject Fragments
Some word groups are fragments because, while they do have a verb, they lack a subject. e.g.
-The poor woman paid all her utility bills. But then had little money left over for food.
- The nurse held a smiling baby. Then posed for the photographers.
In each of the above examples the first statement is a complete sentence and second word group is a fragment.
Note that in each fragment the subject is missing. The first fragments omits the subject of the verb had and the second fragment omits the subject of the verb posed.
To correct a missing-subject fragment you again follow the same two methods that you used for the correction of the earlier types of fragments.
(a) Connect the missing-subject fragment to the sentence that comes before it. Add a joining word if needed for a smooth connection as given in the examples that follow.
-The nurse held a smiling baby and then posed for the photographers.
(b) - The poor woman paid all her utility bills. But she had little money left for her food..
- The nurse held a smiling baby. Then she posed for the photographers.
Practice 5:
Identify the missing subject-fragment in each of the following items. Then write the correct version using one of the two methods you have learned.
-Each morning, my secretary checks the answering machine for messages. Then she opens the mail.
The movie had melodious and popular actors. Yet it made little money at the box office.
Lesson Review
Answer each question by filling in the correct word/words in the blank space.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
164
VU
fragments.
TEST:
Sentence Fragments
Rewrite the following. Correct any fragments.
The word groups beginning with when & which are dependent – word fragment, so each needs to be added to the sentence that comes before or after it. When people are scared, the hair on their bodies really can “stand on end”. Each hair is attached to a tiny muscle which can pull the hair straight up. The muscles react together in response to a great fright.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
165
VU
Lesson -25
WRITING: REVISING SENTENCE ERRORS
In earlier lessons we have been exploring ways of writing more effective sentences. In the last lesson we did sentence errors and in today’s lesson we will continue to look at sentence errors and how to revise these errors.
In the last lesson we looked at the most common type of sentence error - the sentence fragment. Today we shall examine the next two most common types of sentence errors, which are the run-on sentences and dangling modifiers. First we will look at run on sentences.
A run-on sentence is a sentence that is made up of two complete thoughts that have no clear break between them. There are two kinds of run-on sentences:
(i) Fused sentences
ii) Comma splice sentences.
(i) Fused Sentences:
Two or more sentences that run together with no marks of punctuation between them are said to be fused. The two sentences or two complete statements / thoughts are simply stuck together into one sentence. The writer of such a sentence is either extremely careless or is ignorant of the most elementary facts about sentence structure. E.g.
A good way to prevent fused sentences is to read aloud what you have written. Also look within the sentence for words like I, you, he, she, it, we, they, there, this, that, now, then and next. Such words often signal the beginning of a complete thought.
Examples
Recognizing Fused and Comma Splices Practice1.
Identify the following sentences as fused (F) or comma splice (CS). Then mark the place between the two complete thoughts with a slash (/). The first two have been done for you.
E.g. (a) The room is locked / no one has a key. F
(b) The wall is covered with ivy, / a stone path leads to the wall. CS
1. Raheel likes to cook his wife taught him how. ( ).
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
166
VU
Correcting Fused Sentences:
There are 3 ways of correcting a fused sentence.
1. Divide the fused sentence into two sentences.
2. Put a comma and an appropriate joining word (such as and, but or so) between the two complete thoughts E.g. (I) Computer skills are useful in college they will help you in getting a job as well.(Erroneous version)
-Computer skills are useful in college, and they will help you in getting a job as well.( Correct version)
(ii)Yousaf Youhanna has a pulled muscle he won’t play any cricket this season. (Erroneous version)
-Yousaf Youhanna has a pulled muscle, so he won’t play any cricket this season. (Correct
version)
Note:
The comma always goes before the joining word - not after it.
3. Use subordination to make one of the complete thoughts dependent on the other one. To subordinate a complete thought, change it from a statement that can stand alone as a sentence to one that cannot stand by itself.
To do so, begin the thought with an appropriate word, such as because, when, if, before, since, until, unless, while, as, though and after.
Example
-Because Youhanna has a pulled muscle, he won’t do any batting in this tournament.
Note:
Put a comma at the end of a dependent word-group that begins a sentence.
Practice 2: Correct each of the fused sentences that follow using one of the methods described earlier. Use a different method for each sentence.
It’s easy to begin smoking, but it’s much harder to quit.
Because some workers at the factory have been laid off, the others are nervous.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
167
VU
The room looked wonderful. The carpets had just been vacuumed.
Correcting Comma Splice:
A comma splice can be connected by using one of the same three methods suggested for correcting a fused sentence:
-Saad is always nervous about tests. His grades are usually the best in the class.
-Saad is always nervous about tests, but his grades are usually the best in the class.
-Saad is always nervous about tests although his grades are usually the best in the class.
Practice 3:
Correct each of the comma splices that follow, using one of the methods suggested. Use a different method for each sentence.
-Fahd was talking on the phone, and he was switching TV channels with his remote control at the same time.
-Mules are very sure-footed, so they’re used for climbing steep mountains.
-Since the electricity at the shopping center went out, all the shops had to close early.
- Bicycles are the world’s best method of transportation, because they don’t pollute the atmosphere.
5. I don’t like the Principal’s way of expressing herself, I agree with many of her ideas.- Although I don’t like the Principal’s way of expressing herself, I agree with many of her ideas.
Review of Fused and Comma Splice Constructions
Fill in the missing word in each space.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
168
VU
Answers:
Test:
Fused & Comma Splices
Rewrite each of the following sentences using the methods suggested.
-A plane flew very low overhead, and the houses rattled loudly.
- Garlic may smell, but it tastes delicious. It has other good qualities as well. Garlic can help lower cholesterol, and it is also supposed to keep away disease.
3. My psychology final exam is next week; I am very worried about passing it. Because I
was sick at the start of the term, I never completed the prescribed reading. For the past month I’ve been working in the evening, it’s hard to find time to study; I will ask the teacher for extra help it may be too late.
Modifier is one or more words that describe another word or group of words. In the following examples the modifier is bold faced and the word it modifies is underlined e.g. (i)The woman with gold-rimmed spectacles is my boss.
The modifier with gold-rimmed spectacles describes woman.
Misplaced modifier is a modifier that is incorrectly separated from the word or words that it describes. The misplaced modifier seems to describe words that the writer did not intend it to describe. When modifiers are misplaced, the reader may misunderstand the sentence.
-My brother bought a used car from a local dealer with a leaking pipe.
-The sparrow built a nest at the back of our house of grass and twigs.
-Anjum Nisar almost sneezed twenty times last night.
--My brother bought a used car (with a leaking pipe) from a local dealer.
-The sparrow built a nest (of grass and twigs) at the back of our house.
- Anjum Nisar sneezed (almost) twenty times last night.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
169
VU
PRATICE 1:
Identify the misplaced word(s) in each sentence. Then rewrite the sentence placing the modifier where it will make the meaning clear.
Single Word Modifiers
NOTE:
Pay special attention to single word modifiers, such as only, almost and nearly. For their meaning to be correctly understood, they should be placed directly in front of the word they describe.
e.g. (i) I only asked my boss for one day’s leave, but he refused.
I asked my boss for only one day’s leave, but he refused.
I must have answered almost a hundred ads before I found this job.
After returning from college my niece spends nearly all evening on the telephone.
Dangling Modifiers
Staring dreamily into space, the instructor’s loud voice startled me.
-Staring dreamily into space, I was started by the instructor’s loud voice. OR
-As I was staring dreamily into space, the instructor’s loud voice startled me. Here are more samples of ways by which dangling modifiers can be corrected.
-When pulling out of the driveway, the pillar blocks my view.
-When pulling out of the drive way, I find my view blocked by the pillar. OR
– Whenever I pull out of the driveway, the pillar blocks by view.
PRACTICE 2
In each sentence identify the misplaced or dangling modifier. Then rewrite each sentence so that its intended meaning is clear.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
170
VU
the downpour, we were glad to be safe inside. Then we remembered our open car windows, groaning with dismay.
4. I lost my raincoat last winter. I thought I’d looked everywhere for it. Then, yesterday, stuffed under the bed, I spotted it. Wrinkled and dusty, I was still delighted to see it.
In today’s lesson you looked at some more sentence errors – the fragment, fused and comma splices and dangling modifiers. All good writers avoid these errors, and you should also try to avoid making such errors.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
171
VU
Lesson -26
Subject Verb Agreement
In a correctly written sentence, the subject and verb agree i.e. match in number. In other words a singular subject will take a singular verb and plural subjects will take plural verbs. Most students have no problem handling a simple sentence where its not difficult to make the subject and verb agree or match. e.g.
- My mother works at two jobs. My grandma takes care of my brothers and sisters.
Not all sentences are so straight forward.
In today’s lesson you shall learn about situations that can cause problems with subject - verb agreement.
Revision of Present Tense
Before we look at the situations that can cause problems a little revision of the tenses is necessary to brush up your knowledge. e.g.- Last night, I played chess. My friends played cards.
Now this sentence you must have noticed is in same for all subjects, whether singular or plural. However, present tense verbs have two forms. Look at the following table. Notice the pattern of present tense verbs.
Plural You work We work They work
Singular I work You work He works She works It works
Did you notice that:
Practice1. Choose the correct form of the verb.
Subject & Verb separated by Prepositional Phrase.
Having revised the present tense verbs we will now look at the situations which can pose problems in subject-verb agreement.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
172
VU
In many sentences the subject is close to the verb, without the subject coming first.
The 1st type of problem situation occurs when the subject and verb do not occur side by side. e.g.
Most shops on Mall Road are having sales this week.
In the above sentence, a prepositional phrase on Mall Road, separates the subject shops and the verb are having. A prepositional phrase is a group of words that begins with a preposition (such as, in, on, for, from, of, to) and ends with a noun or pronoun.
S V V
Most shops on Mall Road, are having sales this week.
Remember the subject of the sentence is never part of a prepositional phrase.
Let us have short practice of finding the subject of a sentence with a prepositional phrase.
Practice2.
In the following sentences first identify the prepositional phrase, and then pick out the subject of each sentence. Finally spot the verb that agrees with the subject.
Answer:
S PP V
S pp v v
Verb Coming Before the Subject
In most English sentences, the verb usually follows the subject e.g. I (saw) the film.
The plate (dropped) from her hands. A plane (crashed)
But in some sentences the verb comes before the subject. Such sentences often are questions, or they may begin with prepositional phrases or word groups like There is and Here are.
I (saw) the film.
The plate (dropped) from her hands.
A plane (crashed)
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
VU
i. What was the result of the cricket match?
Even in such cases where the verb comes before the subject, the verb must agree with the subject. e.g.
(The verb was is singular, so it agrees with the singular subject result, of the cricket match
is the prepositional phrase).
Remember the subject of a sentence is never in a prepositional phrase.
If you are not sure of the subject in a sentence, find the verb and then ask “who?” Or “what”.
In the second sentence for e.g. you would ask, ‘what are there in the district?” The answer, “unemployed teachers”, is the subject.
For the third sentence, the question would be, ‘what is here?’ the answer, ‘The computer disk’ is the subject.
Practice3.
Identify the subject and verb in each sentence.
173
,
Indefinite Pronoun Subject:
The third situation that can pose problems in subject-verb agreement is when there is an indefinite pronoun subject. Indefinite pronouns are pronouns that do not refer to a specific person or thing.
Each | anyone | anybody | anything |
Either | everyone | everybody | everything |
Neither | someone | somebody | something |
One | no one | nobody | nothing |
Note the subject-verb relationships in the following sentences with indefinite pronouns subject.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
174
VU
e.g.
Note the subject-verb relationships in the following sentences with indefinite pronouns subject. e.g.
Practice4.
Identify the subject and the verb that agrees with it.
Compound Subjects
The fourth and the last type of situation which can pose problems in subject-verb agreement are compound subjects.
1- Compound Subjects
Usually two or more subjects which are joined by and, they require a plural verb. e.g.
-Either grapes or mango ice cream is the specialty every Saturday at the students dining hall.
-Either mango ice cream or grapes are the specialty every Saturday at the students dining hall.
e.g. - Both of my aunts play the sitar and sing professionally. A few of my cousins are also actors
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
175
VU
4. The pronouns all and some are either singular or plural depending on the words that follow hem. If the words after them are singular, then they are singular. If the words after plural, then they are plural e.g.
-Some of the chicken is still on the table.
(Since chicken is singular, some is singular in this sentence a singular verb, is needed).
-Some of the guests are not having chicken.
(Since guests are plural, it makes some plural in this sentence. The plural verb ‘are’ is appropriate over here).
Practice 5
Identify the verb given in brackets that agrees with the compound subjects. i Our aunts and uncles (stay / stays) with us when they come to Lahore.
Test
Each of the following passages contains two mistakes in subject-verb agreement. Find these mistakes and correct them.
Review:
Fill in the correct words in each space.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
176
VU
.
RECAP:
In this lesson, you looked at subject -verb agreement within sentences and how an awareness of correctness can improve your written expression. All good writers keep in mind these aspects of language and avoid these subject verb discrepancies, and you should also try to avoid making such errors.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
177
VU
Lesson -27 Writing
In earlier lessons we have been exploring ways of writing more effective sentences. In today’s lesson we will look at pronouns, their agreement reference and pint of view which are essential for good writing.
Pronouns (Agreement, Reference Point of View)
Look at the following sentences and see if you locate the mistake in each sentence.
Explanation
In today’s lesson you will learn how to avoid the three most frequent kinds of Pronoun mistakes: pronoun agreement, pronoun reference, and pronoun point of view.
I. Pronoun Agreement
Agreement shows the relationship between nouns and pronouns and their verbs and between nouns and their corresponding pronouns. Agreement specifies that a singular noun
/ pronoun uses a singular verb, a plural noun /pronoun takes a plural verb, a singular pronoun refers to a singular noun and plural pronoun refers to a plural noun. A pronoun must agree in number with the word it refers to (sometimes call the pronoun’s antecedent. e.g.
(ii)
(iii)
(i) The students have spent many hours studying for their examinations. The antecedent of ‘their’ is ‘students’.)
The book Yousaf lent me is missing its cover. (‘Its’, a sing. pronoun, refers to book, a single pronoun.)
If your friends don’t get here soon, they’ll miss the train. (They, a plural pronoun,
refers to friends a plural noun).
The following is a list of indefinite pronouns which are always singular.
Each | anyone | anybody | anything |
Either | everyone | everybody | everything |
Neither | someone | somebody | something |
One | no one | nobody | nothing |
e.g.
i). Each of the wild horses raced for its freedom.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
178
VU
ii) Neither of my sons ever feels like cleaning his room. No one in the class wanted to read his / her paper aloud. No students in the class wanted to read their papers aloud.
Practice 1 (A)For each sentence write the pronoun needed and the word that the pronoun refers to. The first sentence is done for you.
Practice 1 (A)
For each sentence write the pronoun needed and the word that the pronoun refers to. The first sentence is done for you.
everything.
Practice 1 (B)
Choose the correct pronoun(s) from the words given in brackets.
chief librarian known.
Answer:
Practice 1(B): Choose the correct pronoun(s) from the words given in brackets.
chief librarian known.
(her, them)
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
179
VU
10. Neither of my uncles has ever smoked in (his, their) life.
II. Pronoun Reference
Just as a pronoun must agree in number with its antecedent it is also necessary for effective communication for a pronoun to refer clearly to the word it stands for. If the meaning of a pronoun is uncertain, the sentence will be confusing. This agreement between a noun and its pronoun is related to number, person and gender, and is called, reference. e.g.
(iii) Each student is encouraged to submit their work on time.
Notice how communication is enhanced in these sentences given earlier. For the first example you can write
Practice 2
Choose the correct word / words from those given in the brackets.
percent discount.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
VU
5. Many people enjoy hiking and camping, but I’m not interested in (them, those activities).
III. Pronoun Point of View
Pronouns that refer to the person who is speaking is called a first person e.g. I, me, our. A pronoun that refers to someone being spoken to, such as you, is a second person pronoun. And a pronoun that refers to another person or thing, such as he, she, it, is third person pronoun. Here are the personal pronouns in first, second and third person groupings. (See on red slide only)
When you write your pronoun, point of view must stay the same. Do not shift unnecessarily from one point of view to another, as in the following sentences.
Personal Pronouns
| 1st Person | 2nd Person | 3rd Person |
Singular | I, me, my | you, your | he, him, his |
| Mine | | she, her, it, its |
Plural | we, us, our | you, your | they, them, their |
180
These sentences can be improved by eliminating the shifts in person:
Practice 3
Improve the following sentences by eliminating the shifts in person.
Answer:
1. What I like best about holidays is that you don’t have to set an alarm.
- What I like best about holidays is that I don’t have to set an alarm.
2. The laborers have to take a break at 11:00 whether we want to or not.
- The laborers have to take a break at 11:00 whether they want to or not.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
181
VU
-Whenever students are under a great deal of stress, they often go into depression.
- If you plan to do well on this course, you should plan on attending every lesson.
5. When I first began to work as a nurse, I was surprised at how rude some patients were to you.
- When I first began to work as a nurse, I was surprised at how rude some patients were to me.
TEST A:
Rewrite the following sentences after correcting the pronoun mistakes.
TEST – (A) Rewrite the following sentences after correcting the pronoun mistakes.
- When I was stopped for speeding, the police officer said……
4. I won’t go to Abrar ul Haq’s concert tonight because there’s no way you could get a ticket.
- I won’t go to ……. No way could I get a ticket.
TEST B:
Each of the following passages contains two pronoun mistakes. Find the mistakes and rewrite the correct version of the passage.
(Bashir told Yousaf, “I need a new car”. Yousaf….. Yousaf agreed ……. So many repairs to his car should buy a new one.
-The restaurant down the road …….. The health officials found …….. Close down for a week. This closing was damaging
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
182
VU
-The restaurant down the road …….. The health officials found …….. Close down for a week. This closing was damaging
Each of the sisters is a successful artist in her own field……. Which she sells by herself from her home.
- (They have nothing in the sentence to refer to). Shouting that the bank employees had stolen his money….quickly because they (passers by) did not know…….
TEST C:
In the following passage each sentence contains one pronoun mistake. Find the mistakes & correct it.
1. When Aunty Mussarrat and Uncle Riaz arrived, we all jumped up from the dinner table
and rushed to the door, shouting their greetings. 2. “I’m sorry we’re late,” said uncle Riaz, “but Mussarrat insists on driving at forty miles an hour, no matter how late you are.” 3. “But you were late in coming home from work and also in leaving Islamabad, and it’s all yours fault”, Aunty Mussarat answered. 4. “The worst thing for me is living with such a fussy man you always have to wait for him to finish selecting his wardrobe, washing his car and combing his hair just right,” continued Aunty.
TEST C
Answer: In the following passage each sentence contains one pronoun mistake. Find the mistakes & correct it.
1. When Aunty Mussarrat and Uncle Riaz arrived, we all jumped up from the dinner table and rushed to the door, shouting their greetings. 2. “I’m sorry we’re late,” said uncle Riaz,
“but Mussarrat insists on driving at forty miles an hour, no matter how late you are.” 3. “But you were late in coming home from work and also in leaving Islamabad, and it’s all yours fault”, Aunty Mussarat answered. 4. “The worst thing for me is living with such a fussy man is you always have to wait for him to finish selecting his wardrobe, washing his car and combing his hair just right,” continued Aunty.
Sentence 1: their greetings - our greetings we all jumped
- We is a 1st person pronoun. Their is a shift to the 3rd person point of view. Sentence 2: how late you are – how late we are
Sentence 3: its – it does not refer to anything in the sentence: and the lateness is all you fault.
Sentence 4: such a fussy man is you always have to wait for him - I always have to wait for him.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
183
VU
Lesson Review
Answer each question by telling in the correct word or words in the blank.
Lesson Review
Answer each question by telling in the correct word or words in the blank.
RECAP:
In today’s lesson you looked at some more sentence errors and how to improve your written expression by focusing on – the pronouns, their agreement and the point of view. All good writers keep in mind these aspects of language and avoid these errors, and you should also try to avoid making such errors.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
184
VU
Lesson -28 Word Choice
This lesson is in two parts. In the first part you shall learn about the use and choice of words and expressions, and in the second part you shall look at a number of words that are often mistaken for one another because they are homonyms – i.e. they are words that are pronounced the same, or almost the same, but are spelled differently and are different in meaning.
To be a good writer you must learn to use words and expressions that are suitable to the subject, to the occasion and also for the audience you are writing for.
Even the most casual student of English soon becomes aware of the fact that there are several different speech levels. Some words are unmistakably bookish or literary, some are informal or colloquial. Every trade and profession has its own technical jargon. Then there are words that are used only for humorous effect and there are words that are never used in polite situations. So you realize that there is a great variety of situations and an equal variety of words to go with them.
Not all writing problems involve grammar. A sentence may be grammatically correct, yet fail to communicate effectively because of the words that the writer has chosen. The student of language and literature must take an interest in words. Slang, clichés and wordiness are three enemies of clear communication. Slang expressions are lively and add colour to our everyday speech but it is generally out of place in formal writing. Most slang terms are often vague substitutes for more exact words.
Careful writers avoid weakening their writing with slang. Slang is a living language no doubt, as new words and expressions are coined almost daily and most of these die out equally quickly. For example:
Slang: When my mother saw me zonked out on the sofa, she lost it.
Revised: When my mother saw me sleeping on the sofa she became angry.
Slang: When my mother saw me zonked out on the sofa, she lost it.
Revised: When my mother saw me sleeping on the sofa she became angry.
Slang by its nature is informal. Slang is commonly used in talk among friends or colleagues but is not suitable for good writing or for formal occasions, especially the kind used by and typical of only one class of persons, such as, army slang, prison slang... As I said earlier, slang may be appropriate in casual conversation, but it is not appropriate in formal writing.
It is not realized by foreign learners of English that slang is used by limited social groups. Slang in USA is different from that in the UK, Australia and other English speaking countries. Slang expressions of the 1960s sound out-of-date or are meaningless now. Use slang only when you have a specific purpose in mind, such as being humorous.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
185
VU
Practice 1.
Rewrite the following sentences changing the expressions of slang by using more effective language.
-All the viewers condemned the new Tom Cruise film.
-I was really very angry when Rizwan called me a lair. 3- Working in the library has been a real drag.
-Working in the library has been boring.
CLICHES
Clichés: are expressions that were once lively and interesting. However, because these expressions have been used so much and so often, they have become predictable, dull and boring. A good writer tries to avoid clichés in his / her writing. Try to use fresh expressions. Here are some examples of clichés.
After all is said and done | clear as crystal |
a long felt want | cool as a cucumber |
avoid like the plague | light as a feather |
bored to tears | make ends meet |
better half | pretty as a picture |
bolt from the blue | red as a rose |
busy as a bee | sick and tired |
cold as ice | tried and true |
In this day and age | time and again |
Clichés e.g.
Iii The children in the nursery class have been busy as bees all day, but they still seem fresh as daisies.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
186
VU
Wordiness
Some writers show off their command of the language by using big, difficult words. Actually this is very annoying for the reader.
Notice, for example, how easily the following wordy expression can be replaced by one or two words.
Wordy Expression Single Word
a large number of | many |
at an earlier point in time | before |
at this point in time | now |
due to the fact that | because |
during the time that | while |
each and every day | daily |
few in number | few |
green in color | green |
in order to | to |
in my own opinion | I think |
in the event that | if |
in the near future | soon |
made the decision to | decided |
on account of | because |
postponed until later | postponed |
small in size | small |
Look at the following sentences and see which ones communicate well.
1. Due to the fact that the printer ran out of the toner, they went to the local store for the purpose of buying some.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
187
VU
- Because the printer ran out of the toner, they went to a local store to buy some.
-We have not yet scheduled the next meeting.
- I think that job quotas are unfair.
To help you develop your skill in choosing words effectively, we will do a short exercise. See if you can identify errors of cliché or wordiness in the following sentences. Then rewrite the sentence.
1. My neighbour's conversation is too gross for me.
- My neighbour's conversation is disgusting.
2. The audience was bored to tears by the lecture on Iqbal.
- The audience was bored by the lecture on Iqbal.
3. Owing to the fact that the buses are on strike, no one arrived on time.
- Because of the bus strike, no one arrived on time.
4. The boys are pulling your leg when they say they can’t be at your party. Don’t listen to their teasing - they wouldn’t miss your party for the world.
- Joking (sl) really want to go to your party
- always exaggerating (s), since (w)
- (happy (c), because (w)
Now we turn to the second part of today’s lesson. We shall look at 20 pairs of words that are frequently confused with one another. The most commonly confused words are:
-When she saw my dress, she said “It’s an unusual one, but I like its colour.
They’re: contraction of they are.
-The teacher told the students that there was no excuse for their failing in the test; they’re going to sit for another test.
-Their belongings were scattered over there on the hill side. Tomorrow there will be an inquiry into the incident.
-If you’re going out in this heat, take your umbrella (belonging to you) for protection.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
188
VU
-Do you think your family will be upset when they learn you’re migrating to Canada? (The family belonging to you).
-(iv) Passed:
The past tense of pass
Past: (a) Time before the present
-As Sajjad Ali walked past the fire, he passed his hands over it
(v) Whose:
Who’s:
belonging to whom
contraction of who is or who has
-The headmaster yelled, “Who’s responsible for the destruction of the painting? Whose fault is it?”
Whether: if
-The weather won’t spoil our holidays; whether it rains or not, our days will be spent fishing and boating.
Already: (adverb) previously or before; prior to some specified time.
All together: (two words) meaning simultaneously or “all at once”.
-The customers were altogether satisfied. (thoroughly).
-They were all together in the waiting room by eight o’ clock.
Angry at: We are angry at things /animals
(x) Liable and apt are sometimes used for likely.
Something is apt if it is “suited for, appropriate to” something else, or a person is apt if he has a tendency to do something or is ready to learn.
Liable means “answerable for” and often suggests an undesirable possibility. Likely means “probably”.
-That was not an apt remark.
(xi) Accept
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
189
VU
Except (a) to leave out
(b) but
-All the workers except the part timers voted for a five day week.
-The management accepted the workers proposals.
(xii) Advice: suggestion(s)
Advise: to give advice or suggestions to
- Most astrologists’ advice is worthless. They advise their clients in such a way that they become dependent upon them for guidance.
-(xiii) Affect: as Verb, to influence Effect: (a) as Verb, to cause
(b) as Noun, result
(xiv)Desert: dry and sandy place (dez – ert) Desert: to leave behind (de-zert) Dessert: Final course of a meal
(xv) Does: present tense of do
Dose: a measured amount of medicine.
- Does a double dose of medicine cure an illness quicker?
(xvi) Coarse: (a) rough
(b) not refined
Course: (a) a unit of instruction
(b) a part of a meal
(c ) Use with of as in ‘of course’
Led: (a) Influenced or persuaded
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
190
VU
Led: (a) Influenced or persuaded
(xix) Quiet:
Quite: Quit:
Silent very
(xx)
Wander: (a) to move with no definite or fixed course in mind
(b) to be unclear in speech Wonder: (a) to be amazed;
-I wandered lonely as a cloud
-I wonder if he is arriving
-I wonder at his innocence
Practice:
In the following sentences select the correct word from those given in brackets.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
191
VU
10. (‘Whose, who’s) application is this?’ asked the office clerk. The young man raised his land, (wandering, wondering) (weather, whether) the clerk thought his application was well written or not.
Answer:
In the following sentences select the correct word from those given in brackets.
In today’s lesson you learnt about selecting the right words and their importance in good writing. You also learnt about words that are often confused with each other because they sound similar.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
192
VU
Lesson -29
Punctuation (Comma and Apostrophe)
Having looked at syntax, at what makes for good, effective sentences, errors in sentence construction and certain features of grammar, like pronouns and their Antecedents, subject- verb agreement, we will turn to punctuation. In this lesson you will learn about the Comma and the Apostrophe - two very important items of punctuation and which cause the greatest problems for students of English.
Punctuation depends upon grammar. Until you understand how one part of a sentence is related to another, you cannot punctuate efficiently. Commas are not marks to be added to a completed sentence for artistic effect; they are very much a part of a well written sentence as are correctly placed pronouns and adverbs.
In writing, punctuation takes the place of pauses, gestures, rising tone and other such features of speech.
Most people make use of some system of vocal punctuation in their speech. Some sentences would be clear enough without any punctuation marks. But readers have come to expect that sentences that are constructed in the same way will be punctuated in the same way. Therefore, certain rules of punctuation have come into being, and sensible writers follow them.
The greatest problems in punctuation have to do with the use of the comma, and the apostrophe.
We shall take up the comma first and then consider the apostrophe. This does not mean that there are no other marks of punctuation: the colon, semi-colon the full stop / period, the question mark, exclamation mark, the dash quotation marks, parentheses and square brackets are other well known marks. But we shall focus on only two as these pose the greatest number of problems in punctuation.
The Comma [,] indicates a very short pause. Writers may disagree about a few of its use, but most of them agree about the five main uses which we will now consider.
Insert commas where needed in the following sentences.
iii The cutlery box if I remember correctly is in the big trunk upstairs
iv. The paint company displayed thirty shades of color but the fussy lady still could not find anything to order.
V. The house agent said ‘It may take you a while to get used to the place.”
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
193
VU
Answer:
i -Before leaving home the child’s nanny collected a milk bottle, a bagful of diapers, a blanket, and a rattle.
Explanation: Commas are needed to separate the items in a series. ii - Although he is eighty, my grand dad walks ten miles daily.
Explanation: the comma separates the introductory phrase from the rest of the sentence. iii -The cutlery box, if I remember correctly, is in the big trunk upstairs.
Explanation: The words if I remember correctly, interrupt the flow of the rest of the sentence, so they are set off by commas.
Explanation: The comma separates two complete thoughts connected by the conjunction or joining word ‘but’.
Today’s lesson explains five main uses of the comma.
Comma Rules
A comma often marks a slight pause / break in a sentence. When you read a sentence aloud, you can often hear the points where slight pauses occur. These pauses / breaks occur at the point where one of the five main comma rules applies.
In general, use a comma only when a comma rule applies. When you are in doubt about whether or not to use a comma, it is often best to leave it out. We’ll look at these rules one by one.
Rule 1: Comma between items in a series
The comma is used to separate three or more items in a series - words, phrases, or clauses may be used in a series as in following examples.
(iii) The tribal elders took part in the dance, their women sold pottery and jewelry, and their children ran around happily playing games. (Clauses).
(iii) The tribal elders took part in the dance, their women sold pottery and jewelry, and their children ran around happily playing games. (Clauses).
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
194
VU
NOTE: Do not use a comma when the series contains only two items. e.g.
-The college cafeteria now serves sandwiches and cold drinks.
Practice 1.
In the following sentences insert commas between items in a series.
Answer:
Practice 1. In the following sentences insert commas between items in a series.
Rule No. 2 Comma After Introducing Material:
A comma is used to separate introductory material from the rest of the sentence. Examples:
Practice 2.
Insert commas after the introductory phrase/clause in each of the following sentences.
Answer:
Practice 2.
Insert commas after the introductory phrase/clause in each of the following sentences.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
195
VU
iv. After waiting in the queue for two hours, the students were told that the office had run out of admission forms.
Rule No. 3. Put a comma around words that interrupt the flow of a sentence.
Sometimes sentences contain material that interrupts the flow of thought. Such words or group of words should be set off from the rest of the sentence by commas. e.g. My mother, who is very old, complains that I do not give her enough time.
One way of testing the interruption of the flow of thought is to read aloud such a sentence. If you read aloud the above sentence you can hear the words “who is very old” interrupt the flow of thought. Such interruption often contains information that is less important to the sentence.
Examples:
-The owner of the house, grumbling angrily, came out of the house to claim his dog.
-The college, which was built in 1937, needs a face lift.
-The college auditorium, though, is in fairly good condition.
Practice 3.
Insert commas around the interrupting words in each of the following sentences.
Rule No. 4. Comma between complete thoughts connected by a joining word.
When two complete thoughts are combined into one sentence by a joining word like and, but or so, a comma is used before the joining word.
Examples:
-Multan is one of the oldest cities in Pakistan, and it is also one of the most interesting.
- Some historians claim that Uch Sharif, another city in Punjab is older, but all agree that the Indus Valley has been continuously inhabited for thousands of years.
-Perhaps you have read about this old city, or perhaps you have even visited Uch Sharif.
-Money may not buy happiness, but it definitely makes misery bearable.
NOTE: Do not add a comma just because a sentence contains the word and, but or so. A comma is used only when the joining word comes between two complete thoughts. Each of those thoughts must have its own subject and verb. e.g.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
196
VU
Practice 4: Insert commas before the joining words in the following sentences.
Answer:
Practice 4: Insert commas before the joining words in the following sentences.
Rule 5. Comma with Direct Quotations :
Commas are used to separate directly quoted material from the rest of the sentences. Examples:
-The coach shouted, “Move, move fast.”
- The student said, “Do you mind if I ask a question?”
-The customer grumbled to the waiter, “This tea tastes like ditch water.”
Note: When the comma comes at the end of directly quoted words, it is included within the quotation marks. e.g. - “After this class,” whispered one student to her friend, “Lets go to the cafeteria.”
Practice 5. Insert commas to set off quoted material in the following sentences.
Answer:
Practice5. Insert commas to set off quoted material in the following sentences..
Review: See if you can recognize which comma rule applies to each sentence. Then identify the place where the comma(s) is / are required.
197
VU
b.
c.
d.
e.
contraction. Here are a few common contractions.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
Comma after introductory material. Comma around interrupting words.
Comma before a word that joins two complete thoughts. Comma with direct quotations.
)
Answer:
(a)
The Apostrophe [,]
Look at the following sentences and see if you can spot the word that needs the apostrophe.
1. it’s impossible to see stars in daylight.
- It’s the contraction of the words it is. The apostrophe takes the place of letter i, which has been dropped.
2. The judge can’t hear the case until next month.
- Can’t is the contraction of the word cannot. The apostrophe shows that two letters (n, o) have been left out.
The apostrophe plus s shows that the new rules belong to the principal. The apostrophe comes after the last letter of the word principal. Likes does not take an apostrophe, because it is not possessive. It is a verb.
The apostrophe after the s, shows that the Greens own the restaurant.
The apostrophe is a punctuation work with two main purposes.
(i)
It is used in a contraction, showing that one or more letters have been left out of a word.
It is also used to show possession - that something belongs to someone.
(ii)
The Apostrophe in Contractions:
A contraction is formed when two words are combined to make a new word. The apostrophe takes the place of the letter or letters that are omitted when forming the
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
VU
I + am = I’m | She + will = she’ll |
It + is = it’s | You + will = you’ll |
Does + not = doesn’t | You + would = you’d |
Do + not = don’t | Will + not = won’t |
198
Contractions are commonly used in every day speech and writing. They are not slang. Some people in Pakistan think using contractions is wrong. Read out a passage and you will notice how frequently words are contracted.
Wouldn’t you like to go to the movies tonight? There’s a film I’ve been wanting to see, but it hasn’t been in Lahore until now. You’ve been wanting to see it too, haven’t you? Shouldn’t we ask the others to go with us? They’re always saying they’ve plenty of free time, don’t they?
Contractions That Cause Problems
There are 4 pairs of words that can cause problems to students. These are: 1. They’re-(meaning they are) and their (meaning belonging to them)
Notice how each of these words is used in the sentences that follow.
their its your whose
-They’re upset about the damage done to their new car.
-Your parents said you’re their favourite child.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
199
VU
-Your parents (belonging to you) said you’re (you are) their favorite child.
-Who’s (who is) the person whose care number plate is missing.
The Apostrophe to Show Possession [’s]
In the following phrases the apostrophe and s [’s] are used to show possession of singular or plural norms not ending in s.
-She reads Huxley’s essays.
In the case of plural nouns ending in S, the apostrophe alone is used.
When Not to Use An Apostrophe: In Plurals and Verbs
The possessive and plural forms of words are often confusing. Remember that a plural is formed simply by adding an s to a word; no apostrophe is used. Look at the following sentence to see which words are plural and which are possessive:
- Samina’s new boots have golden buckles.
+boots, buckles -plural. More than 1 boot, buckle + Samina’s: the word with the apostrophe plus s, is possessive: i.e. Samina owns the boots.
- also many verbs end with an S. e.g. He owns the cinemas . Owns is a verb. Do not put an apostrophe in a verb.
Practice 6.
Add an apostrophe where necessary.
Answer:
Practice 6.
Add an apostrophe
(i)The mood of the department’s head is much better after he gives out the assignments for the day.
Department’s – head belonging to the dept. Gives – Verb. Assignments - Plural
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
200
VU
Review: Identify the correct answer.
1. A contraction is two words combined into
a.
b.
c.
one word
a possessive a plural
2. In the contraction she’d, the apostrophe
shows that she posses something
a.
b.
c.
takes the place of would
indicates a plural
3. To make a possessive, an apostrophe plus an s is usually added to
a.
b.
the name of the owner
whatever is owned
4. An apostrophe is not needed in
a.
b.
a contraction
a plural
In today’s lesson you have learnt about
Punctuation and the problem areas in punctuation skills that are required for effective writing.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
201
VU
Lesson -30
Effective Writing (paragraphs)
In this lesson and the following couple of lessons you will learn the principles of writing. We will begin with how to write an effective paragraph and the principles you learn here will help you to write longer essays/papers.
Writing is not easy, especially in a foreign language. Writing is in fact, a process. It is done in a series of steps & stages. It is a skill that comes with great effort, hard work and practice. If you want to learn to write, you can.
The first thing of concern in writing is content i.e. what you have to say - your ideas, thoughts and feelings. Unfortunately, some students are so self-conscious about rules and about making mistakes that they do not focus on what they want to say. Rules do matter but not at the beginning stage. Now students in Pakistan have a fear of English, especially writing.
Because they have never learned to write they resort to learning model essays and answers to questions by heart. Your attitude in this respect is very crucial or important. It is your attitude that will determine how much effort you will put in in learning to write.
We will begin with a paragraph. A paragraph is a series of sentences about one main thought, idea or point. The paragraph is like the sentence in that it must concern itself with one thought. But while some ideas can be adequately treated in a single sentence, others require the fuller treatment which is afforded by a series of sentences (i.e. the paragraph) or a group of paragraphs, chapters, section(s) or even a book. A paragraph typically starts with a point and the rest of the paragraph provides details to support and develop that point.
Your goal in writing a paragraph should be
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
202
VU
Look at the following two passages. Notice how the topic sentence, which is underlined is supported by the sentences that follow. The first passage is written by a student. The second one by a famous writer. Notice how both make a point at the beginning and then go on to support that point with specific evidence. And that is what we are going to concentrate in this lesson.
My Neighbours
Screaming and shouting at the top of their voices, they play hide and seek late into the night, and their dogs, barking loudly, join them in their sport. As if this is not enough, just when the neighborhood is about to turn in for the night, loud stereo music blares form their house, shaking and rattling everyone's nerves. I think we need to call a meeting of the other neighbors and do something about this.
- Taine, History of English Literature
Some writers like to start with an idea and then collect evidence to support it. Evidence is supporting materials – statistics, examples, comparisons, contrasts, causes, effects, and expert opinion. Other writers like to start with facts on a topic and then form their ideas from those facts. Still others like to work with ideas and evidence at the same time. They shape their ideas as new facts turn up and collect new evidence as they find fresh ideas.
Practice 1:
Arrange the ideas and evidence in logical order, the most general coming first.
A. 1The first shelf was crammed with copies of the daily newspapers, The Pakistan Times, The News, The Dawn and The Nation. 2To the left of the papers he had piled copies of The
Herald, She, The Friday Times and Mag. 3On the middle shelf he had a set of the great Urdu and Punjabi classics and a vast collection of science fiction novels and detective stories.
4On the top shelf he had numerous new volumes on cooking, gardening and travel. 5His library testified to the breadth of his reading habits.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
203
VU
Idea Evidence
Sentence 5
Practice 2:
1Mathematics has never been easy for me. 2Now that I am in college, I am having trouble getting through even in business math. 3I never could solve the mysteries of X’s and Y’s, sines and cosines. 4In primary school I had serious trouble learning the simplest arithmetic.
5In high school I barely passed in algebra and trigonometry. 6My father threatened to take me out of school if didn’t learn to add correctly.
Idea sentense 1 Evidence
Practice 3:
Select the most appropriate conclusion you might infer from the evidence given. Place the number of the conclusion you select in the blank space.
Conclusion: 1) Japanese cars give good service for 80,000 miles, then break down. 2) Its time for me to get a new Suzuki. 3) My four-year old Suzuki needs some minor repairs.
81.2 in 1963, 80.1 inches in 1964 and 75.1 inches in 1965.
Conclusion: 1) Dhaka rainfall declined steadily between 1960 and 1965. 2) Dhaka rainfall eventually returned to normal. 3) Dhaka rainfall was 74.1 inches in 1967.
Practice 4:
Identify the evidence that does not support the conclusion. Place the number of the irrelevant evidence in the blank below the evidence. If all of the evidence is irrelevant, leave the blank empty.
Conclusion: The trees in the back yard provide shade all day.
Evidence: 1) Four neem trees to the front of the south side protected the yard form the morning sun. 2) A row of towering eucalyptus trees on the west side protect the yard from the evening sun. 3) Two great rubber trees further back on the south side caught the noon and early afternoon rays.
4) Between the trees were low growing rose bushes, Hibiscus and jasmine bushes.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
204
VU
As I stated earlier writing usually takes place in steps. These are
Step I: Brainstorming
Children hid & seek
daughter shouts Babaji
noisy neighbors
loud music
TV
stereo
something needs to be done
dogs barks loudly
loud music
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
205
VU
Lesson -31
Writing: Paragraph
In the last lesson we started to look at paragraph writing. We considered the different parts of a paragraph, and we examined the paragraph My Neighbours. We noted that a good paragraph has three major structural parts: a topic sentence, supporting sentences and a concluding sentence.
In addition to the three structural parts of a paragraph, a good paragraph also has the elements of unity and coherence.
First we will look at the first element UNITY. By unity we mean that only one main idea is stated in the topic sentence and the coherence that follows each and every supporting sentence develops that idea. If you are writing on Dreams and you say in your topic sentence that you are going to discuss two important characteristics of dreams, then discuss only these two characteristics only. Do not discuss any thing else such as what you dreamt the night before.
Or if you were writing on Television, and in your topic sentence you say that you are going to discuss the effects of TV on society, then discuss only that. Do not discuss anything else such as the invention of television. The second element of importance in a paragraph is COHERENCE. By coherence we mean that your paragraph is easy to read and understand because (i) the supporting sentences are in some kind of logical order and (ii) your ideas are connected by the use of appropriate transitional words. We shall look at the topic sentence from the following points
Characteristics Position
Practice: to recognize topic sentences
Parts of topic sentences Writing topic sentences
Pract: Writing concluding sentence
Review:
A well written paragraph has 5 elements
The Topic sentence. Remember the earlier reading lessons in which we have discussed the topic sentence in detail. You have looked at the topic sentence from the readers’ point of view. Now you will work at it from the writer’s point of view. The topic sentence is the most important sentence in a paragraph as it indicates what the paragraph is going to discuss, and for this reason it is a helpful guide, both for reader and writer.
The topic sentence is
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
VU
-Driving on the motor way requires skill and agility
- Platinum, a precious metal is used for two purposes.
Notice that these 2 sentences are general statements; they do not contain any specific details.
The topic sentence may appear anywhere in the paragraph. It is usually the first or the last sentence of the paragraph. The topic sentence may also be the first and the last sentence of the paragraph. Let us look at three paragraphs
I) My study table is well organized. I keep ball point pens and coloured pencils in the top right drawer. Writing paper is in the middle right drawer. The bottom right side has all the other material I might need, from paper clips to staples and tapes. The top of the desk is clear, except for a study lamp and a monthly planner. The left side of the desk has two drawers. The bottom one is a file drawer, where I keep my lecture notes from each class. And in the top drawer? That’s where I keep peanuts, raisins, chocolates and chewing gum that I snack on while I study.
Here you notice the paragraph begins with a topic sentence “My study table is well organized”. The first sentence is a general statement. The main idea - that the writer’s desk is well organized - is in the first sentence. The rest of the sentences show us how well organized the desk is.
2) Do you have problems with sleeping? By following a few single guidelines many sleep problems can be avoided. First, don’t drink tea or coffee close to bedtime. Next, do not exercise at least three hours before bedtime. Lastly, work out a sleep routine. Try to go to bed at the same time and try to get up at the same.
Here the first sentence introduces the topic of sleep problems by asking a question. A question can never be a topic sentence. It is not making a statement. The second sentence “By following a few simple guidelines many sleep problems can be avoided” states the author’s main idea about that topic.
Topic sentences may even come later than the second sentence. See if you can find the topic sentence in the following paragraph.
(3) Today world-wide communications are taken for granted. Through telephone, TV and the internet, we learn instantly what happens all over the world. In ancient times, however, military leaders relied on a much slower, less technical method of sending important messages - pigeons. Homing pigeons are trained to return home from long distances. The birds were kept in cages at the military camps. When a message had to be sent, it was tied to the bird’s leg. The bird was then released and it flew back to its base camp after delivering the message.
206
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
207
VU
At first glance sentence 1 appears to state the main idea as sentence 2 gives examples of the world- At first glance sentence 1 appears to state the main idea as sentence 2 gives examples of the world-wide communication. But it isn’t. Sentence 3 which also states a general idea, but points the reader towards another direction (as signaled by the word however) Sentences 4, 5, 6 and 7 provide details to support it. It becomes clear that sentences 1 & 2 lead up to the true main idea of the paragraph which is stated in sentence 3. This is clear because sentences 4, 5 and 6 all give information that explains in detail the general statement in sentence 3.
A At first glance sentence 1 appears to state the main idea as sentence 2 gives examples of the Sometimes a topic sentence may end a paragraph. When this is so the previous sentences build up to the main idea. Here is an example of a paragraph in which the topic sentence comes last.
World-wide communicati But it isn’t. Sentence 3 which also states a general idea, but points
Probably in the coming decade there will be more use of home computers. People will use them to shop, to cast votes, file taxes, and to take college and university exams. Also, they will be used for playing games. Experts say the work week will be reduced to less than thirty-two hours. Moreover, robots will not only take over many routine service jobs but many dangerous jobs as well. As these forecasts suggest, the coming decade is likely to be a decade of home computers.
Reviews 1- To find out what you have learned so far answer each of the following questions. Fill in the blank or put a tick mark against the answer you think is correct.
1. The topic sentence of a paragraph states the
Now we shall turn to the parts of a topic sentence. A topic sentence has two essential parts - the topic and the controlling idea. The topic (names) the subject or main idea of the paragraph.
The controlling idea makes a specific comment about the topic, which indicates what the rest of the paragraph will be about. It limits the topic to a specific aspect of the topic that will be discussed in the paragraph. e.g.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
208
VU
- Television commercials are misleading.
Writing Topic Sentence:
Now you shall have some practice in writing topic sentence. Remember
(Too many controlling ideas- would require 3 separate paragraphs)
Practice Writing Topic Sentences
Write a topic sentence for each of the following topics include both a topic and controlling idea)
Television is seriously affecting children. Their attention span has shortened notably. They are now so used to a TV being on that they have trouble working in quiet classrooms.
Books of travel have always been popular. Even in ancient times traveler's tales were eagerly read. Name a few travelers
A beautiful garden is a constant source of pleasure. (Talk about some pleasure - sit in peace and quiet. Place of retreat, rest.
Popular entertainment such as pop music has undergone great changes.
Whether travel in foreign lands will benefit the traveler depends entirely on the traveler himself. Opening sentences given - try to carry on from here.
The Concluding Sentence: A concluding sentence has two purposes:
The following examples illustrate two different types of concluding sentences. The concluding sentence may repeat the main idea of the topic sentence in different words or it may summarize the main points of the paragraph which are not stated in the topic sentence.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
209
VU
Examples:
(I) Synonyms: Most people think of ‘synonyms’ as words ‘having the same meaning’, but it is easy to show that synonyms are always partial, never complete. ‘Tall’ and ‘high’ are usually considered synonyms but while we can have both a tall building and ‘a high building’ we cannot have both ‘a tall boy’ and ‘a high boy’. Therefore, we should be careful in choosing words because many words that we considered turn out not to be really synonyms (repeats main idea of topic sent)
(ii) Some people delight in inflicting pain on harmless little creatures. Such as flies, worms and frogs. They also take pleasure in killing them. This is very cruel of them. They ought not to do so, because it is wrong to cause unnecessary pain to any creature. Besides, from being cruel to little animals, men are often led, to become cruel to then fellow creatures, and they learn to do very cruel deeds. Whenever a man is tempted to hurt or kill any such creature he should pause to think show he would feel if any creature more powerful than he, were to do the same to him. (Concluding sentence summarizes the main 2 points not specifically stated in the topic sentence.)
Practice 4: Writing Concluding & Sentences
In the following paragraphs underline the topic sentence. (a)Determine the main idea of each paragraph.
(b)Add a good concluding sentence with an end of paragraph signal (Finally, to sum up, at
last, in conclusion).
Paragraph 1:
The scientist is more interested in doing scientific work than in defining it. He sometimes says that a piece of work or book is unscientific, and what he actually means by that phrase is that it is inexact, that it is badly arranged; that it jumps to conclusions without sufficient evidence, or that the author has allowed his personal prejudices to influence his report……... [by scientific work, then we mean that which is as exact as is possible, orderly in arrangement, and based on sound and sufficient evidence].
Paragraph 2:
The habit of economy can easily be formed if we have a will to save. The first important thing in the formation of this habit, as in the case of many others, is to make a beginning. It does not matter with what sum we begin. We should make use of the first opportunity to make a beginning; secondly we should keep this habit alive by consistent effort. All this is possible only by a strong will-power. If once we decide to save, we should start immediately……...
Paragraph 3:
There are numerous everyday words in English that have come from other languages. English speakers relaxing at home, for example may put on pajama's which is a Persian word. A sleep in the afternoon is called a ‘siesta’ a Spanish word. When we wash our hair we ‘shampoo’ it - from the South Indian word champi.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
210
VU
Writing Practice Home Work.
Choose a topic from the list below and write a paragraph 4-5 sentences in length.
Step I : Begin para w.good topic sentence.
Topics
Your instructor will give you a time limit, suggested limits:
Writing time = Checking time =
Total =
13 minutes
02 minutes
15 minutes
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
211
VU
Lesson -32
(Unity, Coherence and Organization)
In the last lesson, we have looked at the three structural parts of a paragraph. In addition, we have learned that a good paragraph requires the elements of unity and coherence. We will first look at unity in a paragraph.
Unity
A good paragraph has unity i.e. in each paragraph only one main idea is discussed. Unity has two parts. Every supporting sentence in the paragraph must be directly related to the main idea. This is the first part of unity. Remember, do not include any information that does not directly support the topic sentence. e.g. if your paragraph is about the ‘advantages of foreign travel’ discuss only that. Do not discuss traveling locally. To make it better, discuss only one advantage in each paragraph. However, sometimes it is possible to discuss two or three aspects of the same idea in one paragraph if they are closely related to each other.
The second part of unity is that every supporting sentence must directly explain or prove the main idea expressed in the topic sentence. Students often write supporting sentences that are way off the topic. For example if you are writing about the high cost of college fees, you could mentions inflation as one factor. But if you go on to write three or four sentences on inflation and the difficulty of educating three or four children of a family then you are wide off the topic, and your paragraph will lack unity. The unity of a paragraph is determined by the terms of the topic sentence.
Your sentences must be related to the key terms of the topic sentence. Otherwise, it must be left out.
Look at the following paragraph. Which sentence does not contribute to a unified effect?
Playing tennis keeps my mother fit
1. Running around the courts keeps her muscles toned up and gives them the
flexibility of a teenager.
We still have the cup she won for finishing first in the one-mile race in her college Annual Sports.
Serving especially gives her a sense of balance.
Even at the age of fifty two, my mother continues to play tennis and she plays it well.
2.
3.
4.
In the following paragraph notice how all the details are unified – they are about the same subject / topic of the paragraph.
Hamid was a big, bouncy guileless man who slapped you on the back whenever he met you. He loved to crack jokes and would poke you in the ribs to make sure you got the point of his jokes. He had a passion for food and a passion for ideas. ‘Now take the constitution,
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
212
VU
for instance. I can’t believe that we have made a mess of it. There is only one way to come out of this practical mess.’ he would continue, examining one idea after another. His strong, protruding teeth would glisten from far away as he sat in the midst of friends, eating and discussing.
How do we determine that this a unified paragraph?
Note the specific terms of the subject/topic and the specific terms of the comment about the subject. Hamid is the subject, and it is obvious that only concrete explanations would maintain unity, and not just any vague comment about him. That comment centers round the words, big, bouncy, guileless, and on his having a passion for food, and a passion for ideas.
In the next example, note the details that have been selected to develop the topic of paragraph are more specific, more concrete than the topic idea. One thing that you must remember is that do not lengthen paragraphs by throwing in more generalities.
In the following paragraph which sentence is not concrete enough.
1- The young Pakistani woman has become a puppet in the hands of fashion gurus. 2- She does everything they tell her to do. 3- She raises hemlines when they give the nod. 4-They are lowered when a new look is needed to raise sales. 5-At their suggestion she wears bright colours, and when they propose dull colors, she takes to wearing drab colors.
It is sentence no. 2 which merely repeats what the topic sentence says. You should not merely repeat the same statement in different but equally general words. In the examples you have seen so far all of the details have been equal to one another. This does not happen all the time. The details of a paragraph may have other logical relationships to each other. There may be sub divisions and further sub divisions of sub division. For example if you are asked to write on the characteristics of a good Pakistani citizen, you may break down the characteristics into three subdivisions – awareness, knowledge and action. You may provide concrete details for all or some of the subdivisions. It need not be in the same quantity for each.
Characteristics of a Good Pakistani Citizen
a) Awareness – what is happening in the world around him at the local, national and
international level
Knowledge – of his basic human rights, constitutional rights.
Action – participation in community work, political participation (voting)
b)
c)
Length & Type
A good, effective paragraph should be long enough to clinch its point. How that can come about will depend on the topic and the audience who is to read depends on the topic and the audience who is to read the writing. For instance a strong argumentative position might require proof. You will have to see if the terms of the topic have been discussed.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
213
VU
Practice 1:
Here is a topic sentence. Look at its key terms. Then decide which detail would not be related to the key term.
Topic sentence: Folk songs are popular because of their greater realism.
Key Terms: popular, greater realism
Details:
2. Topic which detail would not be unified with regard to the key terms of the following topic sentence.
Topic Sentence: Inflation has affected a varied cross section of the public
Key Terms: Details:
Affected, cross section
3. Which detail would not be unified with regard to the key terms of this topic sentence? Topic Sentence: The pollution problem has increased in great proportions.
Key Term: Increased
Details: a) Cars & buses on city sheets
b)
c)
d)
Deforestation Polluted rivers
Competition by imported vehicles
4. Which detail is not a subdivision in the development of a paragraph on historical novels.
5. In a paragraph on Urdu films, which three details would be grouped under a major subdivision about the qualities of the hero?
helped the housewife
Key Term: Helped, housewife
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
214
VU
3._ Fridge, Saves daily cooking
II. Coherence
Now we shall look at the second element of a good paragraph i.e. coherence-which means “to hold together.” Coherence in writing refers to the movement from one sentence to the next which must be smooth and logical. In the same way in a longer piece of writing the movement form one paragraph to another must be smooth and logical. In other words it means there should be no sudden jumps in thought. Each sentence should flow smoothly into the next. Coherence can be achieved in two ways.
i)
ii)
By using transition signals to show how one idea is related to the next. By arranging sentence in a logical order.
Transition Signals
We have had a lot of transition signals in our earlier lessons. It was from the perspective of reading. Now we are going to look at transition signals for the perspective of writing. Some writers think of transition signals similar to the road side traffic signs that tell the reader the direction he/she has to take. In other words they tell the reader when the writer is taking a similar route idea (words like similarly, moreover, furthermore, in addition) or an opposite route / idea (on the other hand, however contrast) or giving an example (for example, for instance) or result (as a result) or a conclusion (in conclusion).
By using transition words you guide your reader and make it easier for him/her to follow the writer’s ideas. Transition words give coherence to your paragraph.
PRACTICE:
Look at the following 2 paragraphs. Both paragraphs give the same information, yet one is easier to follow than the other because of the use of transition signals.
Paragraph 1:
Students who come to college from high school find that at first they have a few problems. Their college is usually much bigger than their high school. The new first year student often does not know any of the students of the higher classes. These students are not always friendly to him/her. They play tricks on him/her or tease him / her. Before he/she was one of he biggest students in his / her school; now he / she is one of the smallest. Another problem is that he/she no longer has his/her classroom. He/she has to go to a different classroom for every subject. The unfortunate student has to carry all his things with him/her. He/she is not used to this. Our first year student does not have a class teacher either.
Instead of one teacher whom he/she knows well, he/she has six or seven teachers whom he hardly knows at all. The boy or girl starting college often finds it rather strange at first.
Paragraph 2:
Students who came into college from high school find that at first they have a few problems. The main problem is that their college is much bigger, usually, than their high
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
VU
school. Another thing is that the new first year student often does not know any of the students of the higher classes. And these students are not always friendly to him. Sometimes they play tricks on him or tease him. Another change is that before he was one of the biggest students in his school; now he is one of the smallest.
Yet another problem is that he no longer has his own classroom. Now he has to go to a different classroom for every subject. And the unfortunate student has to carry all his things with him. He is not used to this. Moreover, our first year student does not have a class teacher either. Instead of one teacher whom he knows well, as six or seven teachers whom he hardly knows at all. There is no doubt that the boy or girl starting college often finds it rather strange at first.
Each transition signal has a special meaning. Each one shows how the following sentence relates to the preceding one. It does not mean that you use a transitional signal in front of every sentence. That would be just as confusing as using too few transitional signals. Good writing requires that you use enough transitional signals to make the relationships among your ideas clear.
Practice: Choosing Transition Signals
Choose the transition signal that best shows the relationship between the sentences. Make punctuation changes as required.
(for example, therefore, however).
(moreover, therefore, for example)
The second way to achieve coherence in a paragraph is by arranging the sentences in some kind of logical order. As there are different kinds of logical relationships, there are different ways of organizing ideas and sentences in a paragraph. Your choice of one kind of logical order over another will depend on the topic and the purpose of your writing. It is possible to combine two or more different logical orders in the same paragraph. The two most common kinds of logical order in the English way of writing are:
1- Chronological order 2- Order of importance.
The word chronological is related to the word time. Chronological order, therefore, is a way of organizing the ideas in a paragraph in the order of their occurrence in time.
You could use this order of organization for something as simple as a recipe, and for something as complex as a history of any movement. However, chronological order is not
215
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
216
VU
just used for historical events; it is also used to explain processes and procedures, business, science and engineering. A paragraph that explains how to solve a problem, perform an experiment are known as ‘process’ or ‘how to’ paragraphs.
There are two important points to keep in mind when writing a good chronological paragraph.
Notice how the following two paragraphs are organized according to time.
The History of Computers
The first generation of computers which used vacuum tubes, came out in 1950. Univac I is an example of these computers which could perform thousands of calculations per second. In 1960, the second generation of computers was developed and these could perform work ten times faster than their predecessor. Second generation computers were smaller, faster and more dependable than first-generation computers. The third generation computers appeared on the market in 1965.
–b) How to make Carrot Pudding
––If you want to cook something that is delicious and quick to make try this recipe for carrot pudding. First, scrape the carrots (1 kilo) and then grate them. Boil milk (1 kilo) and add the grated carrots. Let them boil. Add I cup of sugar. Next beat one egg thoroughly; pour the beaten egg into the boiling milk and carrots. Stir the mixture. Add 2 tablespoons of finely grated coconut. Mix well. Cook till mixture becomes thick. Turn off the gas. When the mixture cools pour it into a dish.
The topic sentence of a chronological paragraph in some way indicates the time order. In the paragraph on computers phrases such as in 1950, in 1960 was developed, appeared on the market, 1965 give the reader a hint that this is a chronological paragraph. In a process paragraph, such as the one on how to make carrot pudding the process to be described is named in the topic sentence.
The following are topic sentences. Check with a tick mark ( ) those suggesting a chronological paragraph will follow. Circle the word/words that indicate the chronological order. The first is done for you.
Example:
In the past thirty-five years, (developments) in the field of electronics have revolutionized the computer industry.
1- The worst day in my life was the day I left my family and my friends to come to Canada. 2- In my opinion, television programs can be divided into three types: excellent, mediocre, and poor
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
217
VU
3- The life cycle of the Pacific salmon is one of nature’s most fascinating phenomenons. 4- Gold is prized for two important characteristics.
Order of Importance:
The second common way to organize ideas in a paragraph is to discuss them in order of their importance. This is done in 2 ways. You can discuss the most important point first and work down to the least important point or you can begin with the least important and end your paragraph with the most important. The way you chose will depend on your topic and on your purpose of writing; both ways can be effective.
Suppose you are asked to write about the two most important influences on your life besides your family, and you decide to write about a teacher who had so much influence on you that it somehow changed you. Here, again, you would discuss the two influences in the order of importance – how strongly each affected you. Again, as with chronological order it is important to use transition signals to guide your reader form one point to the next.
Now look at the following two model paragraphs. Notice how they are organized.
Model Paragraphs:
H.W. Choose any 2 topics, one form group A & one from group B and write a paragraph on that subject. Remember to use transitional signals.
Group A | Group B |
(Order of Importance) Why it is important to: | (Chronological Order) |
a) Learn English | A typical day in my life |
b) Stop smoking | The happiest day in my life |
c) Reduce pollution | The unhappiest day of my life |
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
218
VU
Lesson – 33 Essay Writing
In the past few lessons we have looked at paragraph writing. Now we shall move forward and look at longer pieces of writing which consist of several paragraphs. The problems we considered in sentence and paragraph writing are also the fundamental problems of longer composition – the same problems of unity, coherence, and emphasis. While some topics can be treated in a single paragraph others require more elaborate development. In longer compositions we find problems of arrangement. A longer composition, such as an essay, divides itself usually into a number of parts. In what order shall we present them? How much emphasis should be given to each fact? These are some of the problems faced in essay writing.
Now a lot depends on the purpose of your writing. If you are writing primarily to give information, then you need to be as exact as possible in the interest of clear, logical presentation of facts. If you are writing to describe something, or to create an image or a picture then you shall perhaps put less emphasis upon accurate measurement and more upon suggestive and revealing details. If you are writing to tell a story, you will have to decide upon the point of highest interest and arrange your material carefully to give your reader the feeling or illusion of taking part in the action.
Writing an essay is not more difficult than writing a paragraph. There is only one difference – of length. The principles of organization are the same for both: so if you can write a good paragraph, you can also write a good essay.
Process of Writing
Writing usually takes place in steps or stages. There are five stages or steps in the writing process.
Step I: Getting Ideas: Primarily from reading, talking to people, listening to talk shows, TV programs on current issues etc.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
219
VU
CLUSTERING
Children hide & seek
daughter shouts Babaji
noisy neighbors
loud music
stereoTV
somethingneeds to be done
dogs barks loudly
II. Step Two: Prepare a rough outline. This is going to be the backbone or skeleton on which the rest of the writing will be built. It shows at a glance the point of the paragraph and the support for that point. It will help you to see if you need to do more writing to clarify your main point or its support. You shall learn how to write an outline in your next lesson. Here I will just show an example of an outline.
Example of an outline. Biography of a celebrated man
Friends and enemies
School fellows - pranks, conversations Offices held, distinguished figures
a)
b)
c)
d)
Relatives - accounts of his acts of humanity and virtues
Revising means that you rewrite, build upon what has been written to make it better. It is at this stage that you get rid of unnecessary material, improve on what you are going to retain. A typical revision means writing on two or more drafts. Here you insert details left out, put in transition words which would make smoother reading. If you are working on a word processor, take out a hard copy so that you can see your entire document at one time.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
220
VU
(v) Step Five: Proof reading: This is the final stage in the writing process. It means checking carefully for spelling, grammar, punctuation and other errors. Use your dictionary for this purpose. Proof reading is often hard work and students want to avoid proofing. If proofing is done carefully, it will ensure that your written work looks as good as possible.
There is no single correct way of writing English. Good writing depends on a set of specific writing skills. Three skills are involved in writing.
Writing is a form of problem solving. The writer has two tasks before him (a) the task of generating ideas and (b) of composing those ideas into some sort of shape in other words giving structure to those ideas.
All writing, whether journalistic or academic (a report, an essay, an assignment, a term paper, a project) has structure. There is first the introduction, second the main body in which the ideas are developed and third the conclusion.
I The Introduction
1. The introduction is concerned with the topic or subject of writing. In the introductory paragraph you will state the problem/the issue in a few general statements to attract your reader’s attention and a thesis statement to say how you intend to treat the topic/issue of your essay. The thesis statement is just like the topic sentence in a paragraph.
Try to catch the reader’s attention so that they would want to continue reading. This can be done in a number of ways:
By posing a question Using an apt quotation A dialogue
A striking description or image Making a controversial statement Developing a historical perspective / Background
Making an appeal for action / change
The second part of the essay is the main body where you develop the main idea with the help of examples and details. This part consists of more than one paragraph. Each paragraph develops a subdivision of your topic. So the number of paragraphs will vary with the number of subdivisions. Moreover, you can organize the ideas by chronological order or by way of importance just as you did for a single paragraph.
In the third and last part of the essay you draw your conclusion. There are many ways of ending your composition. You should create a feeling of finale / fina:li This may take the
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
221
VU
form of a summary or review of the main points discussed in the body of the essay. Here you may even propose recommendations.
Essay
1
11
111
Paragraph
In essay writing paragraphs are written and designed to serve as part of a longer composition. In a skillfully written essay each paragraph has its own proper place, just as each word has its proper place in a coherent, emphatic sentence. And just as there is a problem of transition from one sentence to another within the paragraph, so there is some problem when dealing with a group of paragraphs. So you can see that writing an essay is essentially the same as writing a paragraph. The difference is of length.
Lesson Review
General Statement Thesis Statement
Introduction
Topic sentence Supporting evidence Concluding sentence
Topic sentence Supporting evidence Concluding sentence
Topic sentence Supporting evidence Concluding sentence
Main Body
Restatement / Summary / opinion
Recommendation
Conclusio
Paragraph
Topic Sentence
Topic SentSeunpceport
Support
Support
Facts & Figures Examples
…
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
222
VU
Check your understanding of the material presented in this lesson.
a.
b.
c.
d.
makes a point
provides specific support
makes a point and provides specific support
none of the above.
3.
The sentence that states the main idea of a paragraph is called the topic sentence.
T/F
4.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Prewriting strategies can help a writer find a good angle to write about.
a good main point to make about the topic. enough details to support the main point
all of the above.
a.
b.
c.
d.
spelling content grammar punctuation
a.
b.
c.
d.
grammar punctuation
usage and spelling
all of the above
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
223
VU
Lesson -34 Essay writing
In the last lesson if you will recall, we briefly looked at the structure of the essay - a long composition. If you recall it was said that an essay has three parts: I- the introduction, II- the main body and III- the conclusion. We shall now look at the introductory paragraph, the thesis statement and the concluding paragraph in greater detail.
Introductory Paragraph: Students often complain that they have difficulty in getting started. A lot of time is spent in thinking the first sentence. Now if you know what the purpose of an introduction is, you would not have so much difficulty.
An introduction has four purposes:
If you remember the introductory paragraph has two parts: (i) General statements (ii) A thesis statement
Look at the following introductory paragraph. Notice the two parts.
1. Anyone born in the twentieth century will have seen a lot of changes take place in nearly every aspect of human life. 2 While some found these changes fascinating, others found them discomforting and they want to return to the simpler, less mechanical life style of the past. 3. On the one hand the twentieth century brought about a higher standard of living, along with higher pollution level, the weakening of human relationships and the diminishing of spiritual and moral values.
You will have noticed that the first sentence in this paragraph is a very general comment about the subject, the twentieth century. Its purpose is to attract the attention of the reader and introduce the topic of the essay. The next sentence, No. 2 is more specific. The third sentence is the thesis statement and is the most important sentence in the introduction. Why? Because it states the specific topic (changes in the 20 century) and lists the major subtopics, that will be addressed in the main body of the essay (the high standard of living, pollution, and values).
An introductory paragraph may even indicate the method of organization of the essay such as chronological order, order of importance, comparison and contrast, or cause and effect.
In short the thesis statement then:
Practice 1:
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
224
VU
In the following three introductory paragraphs the sentences in each are not in the correct order. Rearrange the sentences beginning with the most general statement first until the introduction becomes more specific. The thesis statement should come at last.
Correct order: (Correct order from general to specific and finally thesis statement: 3,2,4,1).
3- In many cultures, people live in extended families in which three generations share the same house. 4- In all parts of the world the family system is undergoing great changes. 5 In Pakistan too, the traditional family system, the extended family is rapidly giving way to the nuclear family and this could have enormous effects on our society.
Correct order: 2,3, 1, 4, 5.
(C) 1- From observing animal behavior to measuring radio signals from celestial objects in space, scientists have tried different methods to predict earthquakes, but have so far been unsuccessful. 2- Earthquakes are the most catastrophic of natural disasters in terms of loss
3-
to human life and property. Despite advancements in scientific knowledge and
technology scientists are still not able to predict earthquakes. 4- This paper will examine the history of the science of earthquake prediction, then discuss each of the methods in more detail, and finally present data indicating the success - failure ratios of each method. Correct order:. 2, 3, 1, 4.
Practice 2.
Study these following thesis statements. Which method of organization (chronological order/comparison and contrast) does each one indicate?
.
Answer:
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
225
VU
Answer: (Method of Organization: comparison & contrast) Practice 3.
The following are thesis statements in which both the method of organization and the major subdivision of the topic are indicated. Each subdivision will be the topic of a paragraph in the main body. Read the statement and say (i) what will be the topics of each paragraph (ii) how many paragraphs will the essay probably contain?
No. of paragraphs ( ):
No. of paragraphs ( _ ) -
-
-
Practice 4:
Look at the following thesis statements. The main topic is underlined and the subtopics are in brackets. Indicate the words or punctuation marks that are used to introduce the subtopics.
Topic: Subtopic: Words that introduce subtopic:
Answer:
Topic -Capital punishment
Subtopic -Deprives a human being of life
-Does not stop crime.
Words that introduce Subtopic - not only, but also.
Topic -Women live longer than men Subtopic
Words that introduce subtopic:
Answer:
Topic -Women live longer than men Subtopic -Less stressful lives
-Look after their health
Words that introduce subtopic: Punctuation mark, the colon :
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
226
VU
(iii) We protect domestic animals because they are valuable to use materially and emotionally.
Topic: Sub Topic
Subtopic Introductory words
Answer:
Topic - Protection of domestic animals Subtopic -Valuable materially
-Valuable emotionally Subtopic -Introductory words -because
Practice 4.
Compete the following thesis statements by adding topics to them. If you use correlative conjunctions (both…and, not only… but also) make sure your structures are parallel.
iii) Foreign learner of English have problems with three sounds:
Answer:
i) This life expectancy of the average person is increasing because of availability of good food, proper medical care and better living conditions.
Writing the concluding paragraph.
The concluding paragraph is the final paragraph and is an important part of the essay. Here you tell the reader that you have completed the essay. This is done by either writing a
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
227
VU
summary of the main points discussed in the main body of the essay or by re-writing the thesis statement in different words. After that you add your final comments on the topic subject. As it is going to be your last opportunity to make your point, you should write a strong, effective message that will be remembered. Let me summarize for you.
The concluding paragraph consists of:
Model Essay: Look at the introduction and conclusion for the following model essay on ‘The Advantages and Disadvantages of Living in the Twentieth Century’.
(Introduction) Anyone born in the twentieth century will have seen a lot of changes take place in nearly even aspect of human life. While some find these changes fascinating, others find them discomforting and they want to return to the simpler, less mechanical life style of the past. While on the one hand the twentieth century brought about a high standard of living, on the other it brought along pollution, the weakening of human relationships and the diminishing of spiritual and moral values…………….
…………………………………………..
(Conclusion) In conclusion, although the twentieth century has indeed given us a lot of advantages by making us more moneyed, healthier and freer to enjoy our lives, it has, in my opinion, not made us, any more sensible and happier. The twentieth century has also made the earth dirtier, the people less humane and our spiritual lives miserable. We should continue to enjoy the benefits of modern technology because they release us from the drudgeries of manual work and allow us the freedom to pursue our interests and objectives. However, we must make collective efforts to preserve the earth’s natural environment for future generations. Also, we should try to build relationships with other fellow beings. In a world which is increasingly becoming more and more impersonal and mechanized. (Concluding paragraph is introduced with a transition signal in conclusion)
Practice 5
Write concluding paragraphs for the following introductions by summarizing the main points or paraphrasing the thesis statement or adding your own final comments as a final message to the reader.
Introduction 1: Modern life is creating health problems. Stress affects nearly everyone, from the highly pressurized administrator to the busy housewife or student. It can cause a variety of physical disorders, ranging from headaches to stomach ulcers. Stress is not something that can be cured by self-medication like the common cold. However, it can be controlled. One can learn to control stress by enjoying a good laugh or going for long walks, and by maintaining warm relationship with friends, family and colleagues.
Conclusion 1:
In the end we can say that although stress, a feature of modern life, causes many physical disorder in the human body, it can be controlled by enjoying a good laugh, going for long
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
228
VU
walks and by maintaining warm relationships with friends, family and colleagues. In my opinion, to control stress we need to cultivate cheerfulness for our own sake.
Introduction 2:
Television is the most popular form of entertainment in Pakistan. People of all ages from all walks of life enjoy watching television. It has been estimated that the average Pakistani watches TV for an average of four hours daily. Thus, TV has had a tremendous influence on its viewers, especially children. Doctors are now of the view that children are adversely affected by constantly watching TV. This is due to the fact that they do not take part in physical activities, spend less time reading, and are constantly exposed to a world of violence that can affect their immature personalities.
Conclusion 2:
To sum up it can be said that effects of television especially on children are not beneficial. Doctors think that being glued to the mini-screen for many hours at a stretch and watching violence has adverse effects. It will not only affect their physical health and eye sight but also their personalities.
(NB: Transitional signal to sum up; conclusion - paraphrase)
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
229
VU
Lesson -35
Writing an Outline
Because an essay is longer and more complex than a paragraph, it is even more important to organize your thoughts and plan your essay before you will begin to write. The best way to do this is by making an outline. In this lesson we will first consider what an outline is, and then consider how it can be used for writing an essay and last have some practice in writing outlines. Outlining is a useful skill to learn because it can be used in both your reading and your writing.
An outline is basically an organization of related ideas. It is a method of grouping together ideas that are similar in some selected way, then presenting them in a simplified manner that clearly shows the relationship within each paragraph and among all the paragraphs.
Preparing an outline is essentially a problem of classifying and organizing. As said earlier, an outline is useful in both reading and writing. Because writing is language that is meant to be read, you can think of reading and writing as different ends of the same communication. All writers use an outline to help make their writing clear. If writers use an outline to organize their writing clearly, their readers should be able to analyze that organization of writing. An outline is like a skeleton which helps the writer to put flesh around it. It is the reader who removes the flesh to see the skeleton underneath.
Suppose you are asked to write about the traffic problems of your city. As you think about the topic you decide that there are 3 main causes.
Jot down the ideas:
Traffic is a problem because:
Later you develop these three points and write the following paragraph.
Traffic is becoming a serious problem in my city…(Name of the city) There are three basic reasons. First, there is a great variety of vehicles moving on the road. There are fast moving, mechanical vehicles like cars, buses, vans, motor cycles, motor rickshaws, and there are slow moving vehicles, like horse-drawn coaches for public transport called ‘tongas’, oxen and horse-driven carts for carrying goods and merchandise. This mixture of fast and slow moving vehicles is the greatest of traffic problems. Moreover, the number of these vehicles has risen considerably in the recent years.
Another reason is that roads are old and narrow. As cars are parked along the side of these roads it makes the roads more narrow, leaving little room for the main traffic to move smoothly. Third, as many drivers in my city do not obey traffic rules, the result is that traffic jams result from cars going one way and buses going the opposite way on the same road. Thus, there is chaos on the roads of my city.
Now a reader, who reads the above paragraph, can easily make out the outline of its organization which would be something like this:
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
230
VU
Traffic problems: 3 causes
From this example, you can see that an outline has two purposes:
How an outline is written:
The writing of an outline will depend on the purpose and the subject of the essay. The important point is that there is no one way that suits everyone and is superior on all occasions.
Look at the first example of an outline. Suppose you were asked to write on the works of Shakespeare. Now that is a vast topic. The easiest way would be to make a list of all that Shakespeare wrote. He wrote plays, and poetry. So you have already classified his work- plays and poetry. You can further classify or divide his plays into three categories- tragedies, comedies and histories. In the same way you can divide his poetry into categories: long poems and sonnets.
The Works of Shakespeare
1. Macbeth | 8. Othello |
2. Merchant of Venice | 9. Henry V |
3. King Lear | 10. Henry IV, Parts I II |
4. As You Like It | 11. Venus and Adores |
5. Romeo and Juliet | 12. A Lover’s Complaint |
6. Midsummer Night’s Dream | 13. The Sonnets (154) |
7. Richard III | |
The Works of Shakespeare
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
231
VU
You noticed the names are the same in the first and the second list, but the second list is clearer. Why? Because there is organization. The names are listed in a meaningful way. The titles are grouped according to similar characteristics under 5 main headings; comedies, tragedies, histories, poems and sonnets. This kind of organization helps in making the differences clear and in focusing on one particular difference or category at a time.
Here are two more examples of topic outlines. Notice the difference between the two.
A B
Books I enjoy Reading
Books I enjoy Reading
Science / Space Exploration
Example (A) is a poor topic outline as it is confused; the main topics are not of equal importance outline. Example (B) is a good topic outline.
In the two examples of topic outlines – Works of Shakespeare and Books I Enjoy Reading, the topics are arranged in a logical order. You have noticed that only topics are given and each topic begins with a capital letter. Because they are topics and not full sentences a full stop/period has not been used at the end of each topic.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
232
VU
Each topic of the same rank is expressed in the same grammatical form. Also, notice the indentation and the same system of numbers or letters that are used. The method of outlining is presented in brief for you.
Sub-headings: A, B, C………………. Further sub-divisions: 1, 2, 3,
A……………………….. B………………………..
II……………………………………….
A…………………………. 1…………………………….
2……………………………. B…………………………………. C…………………………………
III………………………………………
Subject: Travel
Ideas: Means of travel (bus, train, aeroplane, car, etc.)
A particular journey – Peshawar
“To travel hopefully is better than to arrive.” (R.L. Stevenson)
Bacon’s ‘Essay on Travel’, Other travel books Educational value, Holidays , People you meet
Countries I should like to visit, What to see, Language problem, Haj Customs of the people, Preparation
Outline: Guiding purpose: Personal: Why I should like to travel.
I. Value of Travel
‘Travel in the younger sort is part of education; in the elder, a part of experience’--Bacon
A.
B.
Knowledge from books e.g. ‘From Oxus to Jumna Knowledge from experience – visiting Iran, Afghanistan
Pleasures of Travel
A. Seeing new place
1. Customs
B.
2. Languages
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
233
VU
III.
Methods of Travel
A.
B.
car, bus, train – see the country, meet the people (takes longer) Aeroplane (get there quicker).
iviv
Desire to Travel
A.
B.
Why I want to travel Where I want to go
V. Preparations for Travel – passport, visa, buy ticket Note 1: Each heading is expressed in phrase/word
IV. A: why IV B. where
Practice to illustrate the above points 1 & 2
On the left hand side are a series of ideas on the subject of ‘Flower Arrangement.’ On the right is a framework for an outline. Using the material on the left, complete this outline.
History of the Punjab 1) History of the Punjab
I. Period before 1500 I.………………………
Flower arrangement
Guiding purpose: to present this as an art
roses, chrysanthemums etc peach blossom
greenery
a single rose pleasure vases – size Japanese style
lots of flowers effect on rooms parties, weddings good arrangement bad arrangement time of year
A. March ……………………….
B. …………… - chrysanthemums
C. February- …………………….
2. …………a. big
b. small
iv. ………………. of Arrangement
v. The Pleasure from Flower Arrangement In the following the main headings overlap. Write two correAct.edOvnesrpsieocniasloofctchaesioountline:
1. ……………………
2
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
234
VU
II. Moghuls | | II……………………… |
III. Sikhs | | III……………………… |
IV. Period after 1947 | | IV……………………… |
| 2) | I Moghuls |
| II………………………. | |
III……………………… | ||
IV……………………… | ||
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
235
VU
Lesson -36
Writing: Selecting and Researching an Essay Topic Choosing the Essay Topic
Analyzing Essay Titles
(Note Taking for Essay Writing)
Students are asked to write essays on all the subjects they study. It is part of your academic work. You write essays for English, Statistics, Psychology, Economics, etc. So do not think that essays are written for English only. You will be required to write essays for other subjects as well.
Today’s lesson is divided into three parts. First, we shall deal with choosing the essay topic, second, with analyzing essay titles and last, with taking notes for essay writing. Students are usually handed a list of essay topics to write by their teachers. Since a lot of energy and interest is invested in essay writing, it is important to choose your topic carefully. When you first look at the essay topics, you initially only separate those which immediately attract you from those which do not.
Are you being asked about your knowledge of the novel (Let’s say ‘The Old Man and the Sea – (Hemingway) to explore the nature of tragedy or the effectiveness of the minor characters and the fish in developing plot and character, or their role in the creation of dramatic tension?
Your teachers read essay topics with care. They know what ideas and what content they want you to cover in your reading and your thinking about the topic. They may even help and guide you the way in which they expect you to develop your material. Now this does not mean that you should think that there is only one right way of answering the question. The word ‘essay’ has its origin in the French word which means ‘to attempt’ or ‘to try out’. And when you write an essay you are ‘trying out’ your ideas. What I want you to remember is that there are limits on the ways you can handle the essay topic. Therefore, you should from the very beginning analyze what is it that the topic demands. This can save you from working hard over an essay only to have it criticized as “irrelevant”. In this lesson you will learn to develop an approach that will enable you to read and to make better notes. In this way you will learn to refine your thoughts as you learn more about the subject you are writing on.
Characteristics of Academic Essays (4)
Most essays in the Social Sciences share certain general characteristics. There are 4 such characteristics. 1. First you are seldom asked merely to explain or describe a process or event. The task is more complex as you are nearly always asked to combine description with analysis. For example, look at this history topic:
Choose any one day’s working session of the Report on The First Round Table Conference. Identify the speaker and discuss the issues and attitudes revealed in that speaker’s speech?
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
236
VU
How would you handle such a question? Would a summary satisfy all the demands made in the topic?
Here you will notice it is the relationship between the general and the particular which you are being directed to explored.
Characteristics of Academic Essays
But you are being asked to consider various aspects of a problem, select the approach, which seems appropriate to you and to develop it according to a well thought-out plan. So what would be your immediate concern when choosing an essay topic? Ask yourself: what is the essay about? In all respects, it would be CONTENT, i.e. what has to be put into it. There are a number of different aspects that you will have to consider: content, concepts, judgment, and knowledge.
1- First you need to check the general area of content defined by key words in the topic.
E.g. To what extent does environmental pollution affect global warning? The topic is about global warming, environmental pollution and not about the Indus dolphin or the Houbara bustard or any other near extinction species.
2- Second, you should identify the specific concepts on which the topic is focused.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
237
VU
e.g. To what extent does environment and life style of the Hunza people affect their longevity. Here the essay is about the relationship that exists between three concepts: environment, social organization (life style) and health.
The term “To what extent” implies that there may be some truth in the relationship suggested. The terms “Why”, “How far you think this is true” allow room for you to deny the whole basis of the question asked. It is clear that in academic essays there is considerable room for difference in judgment/opinion.
There are some topics that are very broad. e.g. Photography, Inflation, Happiness, Travel, Discipline, etc. One of the major difficulties occurs in actually defining or limiting and wording your topic. You should not expect that you will be able to settle on a precise topic at once. You will need to read extensively and to talk with your tutor before you can narrow down the subject or topic to a specifically manageable focus.
So the first step must be to analyze your essay topic - i.e. analyze the ways in which you are being directed. Look first for the key words which direct how the content is to be handled. e.g. what are the key directional words in the following topics:
-The (milestone years) in my life.
-The (quality) of education in Pakistan high schools has (declined).
The task in most college essays is to ‘describe’ and ‘analyze’. The task of describing may be identified by directional words such as ‘explain’, ‘review’, ‘outline’, ‘enumerate’, ‘list’, ‘summarize’, ‘state’, words which direct you to analyze your material include ‘assess’, ‘compare’, ‘contrast’, criticize’, ‘analyze’, ‘discuss’.
NOTE-MAKING FOR ESSAY WRITING
Note making, is a skill and it is also a peculiarly personal affair. You will find plenty of advice from a lot of people on how to take notes or make notes. Notice the difference between note-taking and note- making. To take notes suggests a passive procedure of recording words verbatim - /v3:beitim/- which means word for word, exactly as spoken or written, like a secretary does while taking dictation from the boss. To make notes demands your full attention. It requires you to be alert to the pattern of thought, its direction and development. You also have to distinguish between what is important and essential and what is not. And it is this active involvement on your part that makes note-making difficult: This is what makes note-making valuable.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
238
VU
As I said at the beginning note making is a personal affair. How often you have found your fellow students who have borrowed your notes complain, that they cannot follow them and vice versa. This is because you recorded information and ideas which you decided suited your purpose. Therefore what you select and how you record it one matters of personal choice. You may pick up a few useful tips from working at other peoples methods, but ultimately you must develop your own system, which must be flexible enough to meet many different purposes.
Why Do You Make Notes?
Think for a moment of the role note-making plays in the process of writing your essay. Why spend time recording material which is already available in printed form? There are practical and intellectual measures for this. No. 1 Notes are aids to memory. If you are reading for writing a long essay, then you must have some system of sorting and recalling information you will need when you finally come to writing the essay.
No. 2 Your notes are the raw material on which you will work: facts, figures, direct quotations will be quickly available.
3. The process of note-making forces you to:
-Understand and interpret the original source
-Continually clarify and adjust your perception of your essay topic in the light of your increasing understanding of the material.
So note making is an important stage in your understanding of your essay topic. It is the notes that you make that will provide the basis for your thinking and the materials for your essay.
What do you note, and how much? The content and volume of your notes are governed by three things.
1. The writer’s intention: you have to shift the information and ideas being presented by the writer to meet your own specific intentions. The writer presented his ideas according to his interests.
2- The discipline/subject in which you are working. If you are working on a literary or historical topic you may need to include many direct quotations. You must copy them with great accuracy.
3. Your own purpose in relation to your essay topic. Do not take down everything - that is just not possible you would be wasting your time.
Your notes will be more useful if they are shaped from the beginning to suit the demands of your essay topic.
How do you take notes?
Your notes will develop their own format depending on your purpose and on the nature of the sources. There are 4 general principles which apply to all methods of note-making.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
239
VU
You should record the author, title, place of publication, publisher and edition and even the year of publication. Next to each key point or direct quotation you must note the exact page system
Record your notes reference.
Leave wide margins. They are useful for writing your own comments, adding cross- references, etc.
Common symbols can be used: such as:
e.g. b/w & btw
=
<
..
for example between and
by the way is equal to
> greater than or became lesser than or came from therefore.
Use abbreviations for common words. agri for agriculture, govt. for government, sci for science, C18 for 18th century, C 19 for 19th century. Abbreviate names that recur frequently: Q for Quaid-e-Azam etc. Be careful not to create so many symbols and abbreviations that will create confusion for you.
The techniques of outlining and note making are related whatever method you choose for keeping notes their form should clearly show the relative importance of ideas and their relationship. An outline, with its indention and numbering system helps you to visualize the way each idea is related to the others.
Practice:
Read the following passage. Then read the two sets of notes and compare them.
In this discussion of art history, we give special emphasis to three basic factors. First, the background: the religious, social, and economic conditions that make art possible in any period. Second, the foreground: the work of art itself, its style and its variation form other styles. Third, the contribution of the individual artist reveals his inspirations and the extent of his gift.
There are two wrong ideas we must guard against. First, art history is not a development from primitive beginnings in the past to final perfection in our own period. Styles change but artistic quality is more constant. Superior works of art occur in many periods. Second,
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
240
VU
often one style of art is the characteristic expression of one period. It is useless to attempt any evaluation between styles that have little in common. We should compare a work of art only with work of the same period, as we must recognize that each period posed its own problems and arrived as its own unique solutions.
Now read the following sets of notes (examples A & B). Compare them. Which one is better?
Example A: The author says that there are three basic factors to be considered in art history. The first is the religious, social and economic background. Then there is the style of the art itself, and finally the contribution of the individual artist. But there are two wrong ideas about art history. It is not a development through history: “superior works of art occur in many periods.” Since each period in art history has its own problems and solutions, we cannot compare works of art form different periods.
Example B:
I. Three basic factors in art history
II. Must guard against two wrong ideas
periods,
Notice that both examples contain identical information. The only difference is the arrangement. The main ideas and supporting details are set out clearly in Example B. This form makes it much easier to recognize the important ideas at a glance.
Practice in Note Making:
Make notes on the following passage by writing an outline on the lines given at the end.
Study Skills for Students of English 2Ed, Richard C.Yorkey, McGraw Hill International
We have covered the following topics in this lesson: Choosing Essay Topic, Analyzing
Essay Titles, and Note Making for Essay Writing.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
241
VU
Lesson -37
Ways of Organizing Texts
Linear Relationships: Line & Process
In today’s lesson and in the next few lessons we shall examine the main body of the essay in detail and give you practice firstly in using many common ways of organizing texts as a whole. Secondly, you will be provided with plenty of examples of different types of texts which will help you to see the principles on which the organization of these texts is based. Learning to write in English is not as difficult as it seems. Of course, no one expects you to write like a Shakespeare in a language which is not your own. You are not aiming at writing great literature. Your need is to write clearly and accurately.
English has a central idea and other related information, and it gets the meaning across to your readers. Here I would like to add a note of warning. Writing is such a complex activity that it cannot easily be broken down into a series of skills and sub-skills for teaching. Although no writing course can ever teach you everything you need to know in order to become a competent writer, there is no reason why you cannot learn all there is to know about effective writing.
In the last couple of lessons, we have been looking at introductions and conclusions of essays. Good introductions and conclusions hold up the ideas and keep the evidence in order. Take away either the introduction or the conclusion and the whole structure will fall but introductions or conclusion do not make up the whole essay or composition. They only give directions and a sense of finale or finality. Between these two ends of an essay, we use a system. The body of the essay is written according to a system or a pattern and once you choose a pattern, you must stick to it. It is possible to combine the patterns in any one essay.
Conclusion Restatement/Summary Para
Conclusion opinion: final comment
There are three main patterns for organizing the body of the essay. Writing showing relationships:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Linear
Spatial relationships Comparison and contrast.
I-Linear relationships (4 types) describing
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
VU
Practice 1:
Read the following text and complete the diagram which follows.
As long ago as 1779, John Frere, an English country gentleman, discovered, at Suffolk, several bones from extinct animals associated with Stone Age flint tools. He published his findings in 1800. Frere’s report was not appreciated for another 60 years. But now Frere is known as the founder of prehistoric archaeology.
New Scientist, London, 1800
List the words and phrases that demonstrate the chronological order of the above paragraph
Practice 2:
Put the following information in an acceptable order.
1- In 1930, the first analog computer was built by an American named Vannevar Bush. 2- This device was used in World War II to help aim guns. 3- Mark I, the name given to the first digital computer, was completed in 1944. 4- This was the first machine that could figure out long lists of mathematical problems, all at a very fast rate. 5- Author important advancement in computers came in 1947, when John Von Newmann developed the idea of keeping instructions for the computer inside the computer’s memory. 6- In 1946, two engineers at the University of Pennsylvania, J. Eckert and J. Mauchly, built the first digital computer using parts called vacuum tubes.
Practice 3:
Read the following text and see if you can answer the questions given at the end.
A Kashmiri Emigrant’s Story:
In 1947, Ahmed Din butt, a poverty-stricken twenty years old farm worker, left Kashmir for Pakistan. What the future held in store for him, he did not know. However, he was not disappointed that it could not be any worse than the past. He had grown up during the cruel rule of the Dogras in Kashmir and had known what it was to be hungry and jobless.
He had watched his mother died of tuberculosis a month before; his father had died a year after Ahmed Din was born. There was nothing now to keep him in Kashmir, and on a cold March morning, he got into a bus bound for Rawalpindi. In years to come, he would remember this moment.
Practice 4:
Look at another version of the same story. Compare the two versions, which is more interesting?
242
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
243
VU
Ahmed Din Butt was a bright but poverty stricken twenty years old farm worker who grew up during the Dogra rule in Kashmir. He knew what it was to the hungry and jobless. His father had died in 1928; he had watched his mother died of tuberculosis in February 1947. There was nothing to keep him in Kashmir, so, on a cold March morning in 1947, he got into a bus bound for Rawalpindi. In years to come, he would remember this moment.
Practice 5:
How to mend a punctured football?
Take bladder out of its cover, inflate it a little, dip into the tub of water, with marker let air out, press to find out the hole mark spot, dry bladder, rub marked place and a rubber piece with sand paper, apply rubber solution to both, let them dry, place rubber piece on bladder, press the two very hard.
Practice 6:
Convert the following process as a flow diagram by filling in the boxes.
STEPS IN PROBLEM SOLVING:
Next the programmer must construct an algorithm flowchart or a block diagram. The relationship between the events is shown by means of a connecting arrow. This is followed by translating the algorithm / flow chart into a computer program. The program is usually written on coding sheets which have a specific format drawn on them. The programmer must then keypunch the program. Or key it in at a terminal. The program must then be tested. Next, take a print out showing if it works or if it has errors (bugs). The last step is to add the data to the program and run the program.
The following table gives some sequencing words that are used when describing a process:
Beginning | Middle steps | End |
-First | -second (ly) | -last (ly) |
- firstly | - third (ly) etc. | - finally |
|
| -at the end |
define the prog | formulate an algorithm flowchart | translate algorithm into a computer prog |
Add data | test the prog | keypunch prog / |
run the program | correct the bugs | key it in at a terminal |
1) Many scientists have worked on solar heating. 2) One such attempt was made in 1949 when a house was designed which was heated by using the energy from the sun. In this house energy from the sun was absorbed by a large area of blackened metal sheets which
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
244
VU
were covered by double plates of glass. 3) The air circulating behind the metal sheets carried away the heat. 4) Before the heat could be blown around the house it was first stored in large tanks containing Glauber’s salt, a given volume of which can hold eight and a half times more heat than water.
Practice 7:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Rice is harvested out in the fields. ( )
Hired laborers load the rice onto bullock carts. ( ) The truck cart drivers bring the rice to the factory. ( ) The laborers put the rice into the threshers. ( )
The rice is threshed by machines. ( )
These machines are regularly maintained. ( )
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
245
VU
Lesson -38
Ways of Organizing Texts: Linear (Cyclic Process & Cause – Effect)
In the last lesson you learned how to write up a time – based (chronological) sequence and a linear process – a process that consists of a series of stages and which has a beginning and an end. In today’s lesson you will still be looking at processes but this time cyclic, not linear. A natural process is more likely to be cyclic than linear. As the word itself tells you, in a cyclic process, there is no clear beginning or end so that the cycle continues. The following two diagrams illustrate clearly the difference between the two types of processes. A cyclic process is described in very much the same way as a linear process is, except, it is not always clear where the cycle begins.
The two types of processes are A Linear Process
Input
a
b
c
d
output
A Cyclic Process
step
step
step
step
Practice 1:
The following flow diagram illustrates the Carbon Cycle. The diagram shows how Carbon is found in the atmosphere, in animals, plants and in the soil. Below the flow diagram is a list of sentences describing the stages in the cycle. The sentences are not in an acceptable sequence. Using the flow diagram as a guide, match the sentences with the stages in the flow diagram to produce a text in acceptable sequence.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
246
VU
)
Acceptable order would be: viii, iv, x, iii, ii, i vii, v, ix, vi.
The Life Cycle of the Malaria Parasite Practice 2:
Study the flow diagram and the text. Some of the sentences should not be there: i.e. they are irrelevant. Which ones are they?
The Life-Cycle of the Malaria Parasite
1- Malaria is caused by tiny one-celled animal parasites, called PLASMODIA that are injected into the blood of man by the female ANOPHELES mosquito. 2- Some diseases are transmitted by tiny water animals. 3- The anopheles mosquito sucks blood from a person with malaria. 4- Once in the stomach of the mosquito these parasites undergo some development and end up in the mosquito’s salivary glands. 5- House flies transmit microbes on their feet.
6- If this mosquito now bits a healthy person, it introduces some parasites together with the saliva, into the blood of the person. 7- The malarial parasites then enter the person’s liver, in which they change and multiply. 8- From there, they pass into the blood cells, where they cause the malaria attack. 9- The spread of insect-borne disease can be controlled.
Sentence No. 2: “Some diseases are transmitted by tiny water animals”, and sentence No.
5. “House flies transmit microbes on their feet” are not part of the life cycle of the malaria parasite; therefore, they do not form part of the text.
The above diagram shows how used water is treated and made clean for use. Write a description of this cycle. While writing keep the following points in mind.
To explain the cycle, consider the best point to enter it.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
247
VU
Break down the cycle into stages. Consider the basis on which the stages might be defined. Use a thesis statement for the introductory paragraph.
Use topic sentences for each paragraph within the text.
Give a title to your writing.
1-In the northern areas of Pakistan the once magnificent forests are slowly being destroyed by the effects of air pollution. 2- Pine trees dying from pollution lose their needless, allowing sunlight to reach the forest floor. 3- During this process grass thrives in the increased sun light and drives out the plants native to the soil, such as moss, which helps to hold rainwater. 4- The soil thus loses its natural power to absorb water and in turn becomes hard which causes rain and snow to slide over the ground instead of being slowly absorbed into it. 5- This results in erosion of the soil. 6- After a heavy downpour, the eroded land finally falls away in huge land slides destroying villages and whatever else that comes in its way, and later causing floods in the plains.
The following table gives some guidelines on the language available for writers to state then degree of certainty
Degree of Certainty
Complete
Verbs
is (not)
Adverbs certainly definitely clearly undoubtedly
will (not) must (not)
actually
strong
Partial less strong
can / cannot could (not)
probably presumably possibly perhaps
should (not) may (not) might (not)
Impersonal i.e. Not commitment of self
It is said that…… x reports that…..
- there is evidence to suggest that …
HOW TO WRITE CAUSE AND EFFECT:
Cause and effect are closely related. There are several ways of expressing cause-effect relationship in English. You may either place the cause or the effect first in the sentence. The following sentences contain the same expression, yet one focuses on cause while the other focuses on effect.
1. Because of his depression, he remained quiet.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
248
VU
2. He remained quiet because of his depression.
When you write about cause and effect you have to decide for yourself whether the cause or the effect is more important to you, and what you will focus on. There are many ways of expressing causal relatives in English. The simplest way of showing cause is: because + clause
e.g The war started because (the extremists had the upper hand in the government).
Practice 4:
Read the following text and note three expressions used by the writer to show causality. Use ( C) for cause and (E) for effect.
TUBERCULOSIS OF THE LUNGS
1- Pulmonary Tuberculosis is caused by infection of the lungs with the tubercle bacillus. 2- Pulmonary damage is due almost entirely to the human form of the tubercle bacillus, as distinct from the type found in cattle which is mainly responsible for glandular and bovine tuberculosis. 3- The bacteria lodge in the lungs is set up a chronic inflammation of a specific, type. 4- They produce areas of infiltration which have a characteristic tubercle formation; hence the name for the organism.
-Study Writing, Lyons & Heasley. CUP
Practice 5:
Which words in the following text show cause and effect relationship?
When rain falls on mountains it collects in depressions in the rocks. The extreme cold causes the ice to freeze and glaciers to form. The ice melts and freezes again due to / with changes in temperature. Erosion of the rock of the mountain depression occurs as a result of the continual melting and re-freezing, and is worsened by / made worse by / increased by the action of wind moving the water. Eventually, the water wears away the rock to form a small stream which carries deposits of soil and rock which cause further erosion, gradually enlarging the stream.
Practice 6:
Read the following text and see if you can spot cause and effect words.
Watching violence on TV is beneficial and helps decrease violent behavior because viewers get rid of some of their own aggressive impulses through viewing and in this way reduce the chance that they will perform aggressive acts.
In today’s lesson you became familiar with 1- Cause- effect structures in texts and 2- expressions of certainty and doubt.
Now you should be able to identify and express cause and effect accurately and clearly by using suitable expressions of certainty and of cause and effect.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
249
VU
Lesson -39
Ways of Organizing Texts (Spatial Relationships & Classification)
In the last two lessons we examined ways of organizing long texts such as essays, etc… We looked into details at the 4 types of linear organizations:
In today’s lesson we shall consider two more ways of organizing texts:
Spatial Relationships:
We shall look at some of the conventions that are used in the description of spatial relationships and you will be provided with practice in writing spatial descriptions. The word spatial means dealing with, happening or existing in space. While writing, very often, we have to describe the location of a place, how a place is laid out, or how a set of things / objects are connected.
Now you shall look at some ways of describing things spatially.
Practice 1:
Read the following passage and note the expressions which tell the reader where the place is.
SHIRAZ CENTER
Shiraz Center is a complex mixture of high and low buildings on the edge of Shahdara and the adjoining locality of Gujranwala, just to the North East of Lahore. Although the site itself was industrial wasteland, it is in the heart of a residential district. Along one side of it, runs a rail track, but in every other direction it is surrounded by bungalows and double story apartment flats. Both Shahdara and Gujranwala are fairly prosperous areas, but Gujranwala in particular, has undergone extensive industrial development.
There are basically two ways of organizing a description of a place. One way is to describe the place as if it was being seen from the air - i.e. a bird’s eye view.
The other is to describe it from the point of view of a walk through it, which is known as a pedestrian's view.
e.g. The sentence ‘Afghanistan is a landlocked country’ seems to be about Afghanistan. In this case ‘Afghanistan’ is also the subject of the sentence. However, in the sentence ‘To the East lies Pakistan’, ‘To the East’ is not the subject but is very important information as it locates the position of Afghanistan in terms of some reference point which we already know.
to the North to the West Afghanistan
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
250
VU
to the East
Practice 2:
Read the following texts and see which is easier to understand.
Practice 3.
Read the spatial description of Lahore and underline the location expressions that are used to guide the reader through the description.
LAHORE: THE OLD & MODERN CITY
The hub of the old city of Lahore is the spacious Minar-e-Pakistan grounds which used to be called Minto Park (the place where the historic Lahore Resolution, demanding the creation of Pakistan, was made in 1940).
Here some of the city’s main traffic arteries meet. To the South West of the park are the old Mughal buildings: the Badshahi Mosque built by Emperor Aurangzeb, the Old Fort dating back to Emperor Akbar, the first Mughal ruler, as well as the famous Demontmorency College of Dentistry. To the North East is the depleted river Ravi. To the North West of the park is the tomb of Ali Hajwairy, popularly known as Data Sahib, the patron Saint of Lahore.
Just beyond Data Sahib are located the district and session courts, leading on to the main road of Lahore, The Mall. It is lined by important buildings like the old Punjab University, The National College of Arts, the Lahore Museum as well as hotels. The goods sold in the shops, here, are marked with fixed prices which cannot be reduced by bargaining as in the shops in the old walled city.
Note:
Descriptions of spatial locations are normally organized according to conventional ways of looking at scenes. The most common are:
The main point is to be consistent. What ever convention you choose, should be consistent and you should use it throughout, so that the reader may not get confused.
Ways of classifying things:
How to relate classification to conventions of writing and to practice writing texts based on classification.
One of the easiest ways to organize things is to look for relationships among objects or
ideas and arrange them according to their similarities and differences.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
251
VU
Practice 4:
Look at the following set of words and put them into groups.
Practice 5:
The following sentences form a text which refers to the classification chart on FRUITS. Except for the first sentence, they are not in the most logical order. Try to arrange the sentences according to a logical order to form a complete text which fits the organization of the classification chart.
Writing a Classification:
Writing a classification is based on convention i.e. how others have done it. But it is mainly based on your purpose in making the classification. Data and ideas are divided into categories and this is done in a logical way. Some types of order are:
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
252
VU
Practice 6: (Sample) | | |
Formal | Education | Informal |
Full time | part time | - |
School | evening classes | correspondence course Open University |
College | short intensive courses | T.V. broadcasts |
University | research based study | radio broadcasts Adult learning centers Self study course |
Practice 7:
See how this letter is addressed.
Dr. Ms. A. T. Shah # 41, St. 27
Mohalla Araian Sialkot. Punjab. Pakistan.
The logical order, here is, from the smallest unit (house to the largest (country)
In today’s lesson you learned how texts are organized according to a pedestrian’s view and bird’s eye view. You became familiar with some expressions of location and learned how to use them in writing. You also learned how data can be classified and arranged in diagrams and texts. You should now be familiar with some expressions of classification and will be able to use them in sentences and texts.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
253
VU
Lesson -40 Writing Skills Paraphrasing
In today’s lesson you will learn about two things; 1- How to paraphrase
One of the things you have to learn in studying English is, how to express yourself in more than one ways. This can be best done by practice in paraphrasing. A paraphrase is the expression of the meaning of a passage in a different way. Paraphrasing is a writing skill in which an idea (s) or information written in another way without changing the meaning. It is, in other words, writing the given information in different words i.e. you re-phrase the words without changing its original meaning. Paraphrasing is often used in place of direct quoting what a writer has said. It is a skill and is used to rewrite short selections, a series of sentences or paragraphs. A paraphrase is usually as long as the original text in order to communicate its full meaning. Here are some techniques that can help you in writing a paragraph.
synonyms wherever possible.
Step 1. Read the passage carefully a number of times till you understand it fully.
Step 2. Look up words in a dictionary that you do not understand. Try to find synonyms for them.
Step 3. Jot down the main points of the passage.
Step 4. Make an outline with the help of the points you have jotted down. Remember your outline should contain
a b.
c.
The main idea
the main supporting ideas or points
the primary and secondary supporting details.
Step 5. Write the paraphrase using your own words without omitting any essential idea.
Step 6. Polish the paraphrase.
Practice 1:
It is said that, when in 1998, Brazil lost the World Cup to France; the Brazilians were so disheartened that one had the impression that a big national disaster had taken place and the country itself had died. They say that many did die of sadness. Defeat in championship matches has often caused heart attacks and the despair of the public is usually so great that many take their own lives. Such is the passion of football fans.
Outline
A Brazil lost World Cup 1998
1.
2.
Entire country sad Some deaths
B
Possible defeat causes strong reaction.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
254
VU
1.
2.
Heart attacks Suicides
C Football fans very emotional.
Paraphrase:
In 1998 Brazil lost the World Cup to France. The entire country was overcome with sadness; some people even died. Defeat in championship matches causes strong reaction among fans, from heart attacks to even suicides. Football fans are very emotional about the game.
Practice 2:
The best approach to students’ co-operation is the organization of thrift societies. The principle of thrift is as important from the co-operative as it is from the educational point of view. Thrift gives a basic foundation to character and it is easy to form this habit in one’s early life. In the process of the formation of this habit, the young student will have to exercise rigorous self-discipline which will not only have a great effect on his own spiritual life but will react on his family, and through the family on society as a whole.
Words: Thrift = saving, economy. Rigorous = firm, demanding, strict.
Outline:
How students can best cooperate -- thrift societies -- threefold value of thrift -- foundation of character -- formation of habits -- exercise of strict disciplines -- effect of thrift -- its deeper influence, spiritually and financially.
Practice 3.
Each of us is here for a brief sojourn; for what purpose, he knows not. Though he sometimes thinks he feels it, but from the point of view of daily life, without going deeper, we exist for our fellowmen ---in the first place for those, one depends, and next for all those, unknown to us personally with whose destinies we are bound up by the tie of sympathy. A hundred times every day I remind myself that my inner and outer life depends on the labors of other men, living and dead, and that I must exert myself in order to give in the same measure as I have received and am still receiving. - Albert Einstein
Sojourn = stay, rest, stopover, visit Destiny = lives, fate, fortunes Exert = effort, apply
Measure = amount, portion, share
Outline:
Our life brief -- purpose unknown-- but simply felt -- our immediate relation first to those with whom we are intimate, then to those we are allied with by sympathy -- the dependence of my life on the labor of the living and the dead -- feel the duty of give and take.
Practice 4 :
Paraphrase the following passage. Follow the steps given earlier.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
255
VU
Kaleem Omar, the journalist, has studied Japanese business customs and habits. He says that the Japanese prefer to work collectively as members of groups rather than individually. This, he says, is one of the main reasons for Japan’s economic success.
Outline.
Paraphrase:
K. Omar the journalist says that the Japanese like to work together in groups and not singly. He believes that this feature is one of the most important factors responsible for Japanese economic success.
Practice 5:
POEM
Lives of great men all remind us We can make our lives sublime, And departing leave behind us Footprints on the sands of time, Footprints that perhaps another, Sailing o’er life’s solemn main,
A forlorn and shipwrecked brother, Seeing, shall take heart again.
Sublime – lofty, exalted, eminent, grand, noble- Forlorn- abandoned, deserted, friendless, Solemn - serious, sober, grave
Main - (obs.) open sea
Removing the inversions and rewriting the sentences in the same order.
Outline:
We may make our lives great--- Departing, we may leave behind us footprints on the sands of time---There may be footprints which may be seen by a shipwrecked brother and may help him to take heart again.
Paraphrase:
The lives of all great men remind us that we may also live (make) noble
(sublime) lives and when we die (departing) we may leave records of our actions (footprints) in this world (sands of time) like the marks of footsteps left by travelers on the sands of the seashore. These records (foot prints) may be noticed by some serious and grave person (a shipwrecked brother) who has no one to guide him (forlorn) and may encourage him (to take heart) in his distress or sorrow.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
256
VU
The paraphrase may be written as:
The lives of all great men inspire us so that we also may live noble lives, and that, when we die, we may leave behind us records of our noble deeds like the marks of footprints left by a traveler on the sands of the sea shore. These records may, by chance, read by some unfortunate person who, having made a wreck of his life, is in the grip of despair, and this may give him fresh encouragement in his loneliness and misery to make a new start in life.
PRACTICE 6:
News Item
Karachi APP – Rescue workers located the body of a New Karachi teenager on the beach at Clifton, one day after a sand bar where he was walking with his friends washed out in the rising tide. Police sources said the body of Mohammad Irfan, 15, was recovered on the beach on Sunday morning. The body was found 2½ miles away from the area where he fell about 6:15 pm., Saturday after noon. The boy and his friend, Ali Zaman, were walking on the sand bar with other teens when the sand washed out form under them, said the victim’s mother, Zainab Khatoon. Passers-by pulled Ali Zaman to safety, witnesses said.
Pharaphrase:
On Sunday, the body of a young man who was drowned while walking on a sand bar, washed away by the tide and was discovered at Clifton beach on Saturday afternoon. His friend who was with him at the time of the accident had been rescued by passers – by.
Some more examples of paraphrase:
Our religion is not of the true kind, for we act in just the opposite way of its teaching.
The smallest joint in the bones of my hand is a far more wonderful thing than any machinery.
The main argument for retaining capital punishment for murder is that it will act as a deterrent.
Nothing can be earned without labour, so set to work, my hands, for what land I have is heavily taxed.
No man would be as stupid as to prefer war over peace; for in peace the young bury the old, while in war the old bury the young who die fighting in war.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
257
VU
Applicants should state why they need special treatment.
All civilians will report at the guard room for permission to enter. Offenders will be prosecuted.
In case the school day is shortened owing to monsoon rains, the Education Office must be informed immediately.
The Education Office must be informed as soon as possible if monsoon rains make it necessary to end school earlier than usual.
You looked at different samples of paraphrases – single sentences, short prose passages, a poem, and a news item.
In today’s lesson you learned how to express yourself in a different way. Paraphrasing is a very useful writing skill and goes a long way in helping develop your writing abilities.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
258
VU
Lesson -41
Writing a Summary
Today’s lesson deals with another writing skill – how to write a summary. A summary is similar to a paraphrase except that a summary is usually shorter. When you summarize, you compress large amounts of information into the fewest possible sentences. In order to do this, you include only the main points and main supporting points, leaving out the details.
A summary or precis (French word which means the same as summary) is a brief and clear
statement in a connected and readable shape of the substance of a longer passage. Definitions are useful things, even when they make the thing defined sound dull as the above definition does. The reasons for learning how to summarize are really sensible. They are:
Definition:
A summary or precis (French word which means the same as summary) is a brief and clear
statement in a connected and readable shape of the substance of a longer passage.
As a foreign learner of English any examination you take, the examiners are likely to test your ability to read, write and think in English. A summary writing will give you;
Polish the draft:
A summary is a brief and clear statement in a connected and readable shape of the
substance of a longer passage.
You noticed five words have been underlined.
In the middle ages people had no ideas of scientific farming. Spare cattle were killed and salted for winter eating. Spices were used a lot. They came from the East. The Turks cut the line of supply. Voyages of exploration were undertaken partly to find spices.
As people in the middle ages had no idea of scientific farming, spare cattle had to be killed and salted for winter eating. This unappetizing meat led to a demand for spices, and one reason for the great voyages of exploration was the shortage of spices when the trucks cut the overland route of their supply.
Here are some more examples of phrases that would be better expressed in single words:
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
259
VU
of a disagreeable nature of a delightful description in a brief manner
in a stupid way. of a silly kind
Here are some more examples that show how easy it is to write wordily and also how the wordiness might be avoided.
-Boys whose way of life is cast in an urban environment
- town boys ( (11)
Together with the addition of (5)
- also (1)
Special attention will be paid to
activities with an eye to the cultivation of the qualities of initiative, etc. (18)
- special attention will
be paid to activities to cultivate initiative (10)
Judged in the light of their results (7)
- Judge by their results (4)
In this connection it should be said (7)
- Here it should be said (5)
Practice 1:
Writing Briefly & Clearly:
It is interesting to note that punishments increase as the school team progresses (13)
The recent increase in the number of malaria cases in this area requires that more doctors should be posted (19)
Today two men were seriously injured when their car collided with a truck. (13)
REPETIITON:
People seem, sometime, to think that what they say twice is more impressive than what they say once. Actually repetition shows weakness not strength.
Practice 2:
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
260
VU
Avoiding Useless Repetition.
For three months, the river is in continuous flood; this state of affairs goes on for the whole of that time without cease.
For three months the river is in flood.
In the end we eventually agreed to go by the shortest route. In the end we agreed to go by the shortest route.
Without warning, unexpected, unheralded, the storm broke on us. Without warning the storm broke on us.
Putting Ideas Together:
You can do this by subordinating the less to the more important ideas e.g.
It was quite dark; for the sun had set an hour before and the moon had not yet risen when the thief carefully opened the door of his house and prepared to go about his business. (36) (Here, there are 5 clauses, but it is possible to turn many of them into words or phrases). e.g.
An hour after sunset, in one dark, moonless night, the thief crept to his house to go about his business (20 words)
(Here we have 20 words instead of 36 and the meaning so little changed as to be almost the
same).
PRACTICE 3:
Shorten the following without losing any of the meaning.
His efforts, although, they were the best he could make, ended in failure.
His best efforts failed.
Athar came upon a house that was green.
Athar came upon a green house.
His horses, which were two in number, he used for the single purpose of playing polo, which he was only able to do on Mondays once in every two weeks.
He used his two horses for playing polo on Mondays every fortnight.
Four samples of summary writing:
1. Working conditions in the nineteenth century seem barbaric today: twelve-to-fourteen hour work days; seven day weeks; cramped, unsafe factories; marginal wages, and no legal protection. Yet employers seldom had problems motivating their workers: poverty and unemployment were so widespread that any job was welcome.
- Widespread poverty and unemployment made nineteenth-century workers willing to put up with terrible working conditions.
2. Compromise is a common and effective way of coping directly with conflict or
frustration. We often recognize that we cannot have everything we want and that we cannot expect others to do just what we would like them to do. We then compromise, deciding on a more realistic solution or goal since an ideal solution or goal is not practical. A young
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
261
VU
person who loves animals and greatly wishes to become a veterinarian may discover he has less aptitude for biology than he had hoped and that dissecting is so distasteful to him that he could never bring himself to operate on animals. By way of compromise, he may decide to become an animal technician, a person who works as an assistant to a veterinarian.
-Compromise is a direct way of coping in which we decide on a more realistic solution or goal since an ideal solution or goal is not practical. For example, a person not good in biology may decide to be an animal technician rather than a veterinarian.
-There are two basic types of families. The extended family, which is more than 2 generations living together, is common in pre-industrial societies. The nuclear family, made up of parents and their dependant children, is usual in industrialized societies.
-Psychologist has distinguished 3 functions of emotions in our lives. Emotions can prepare us to take action, shape our future behavior, or regulate our social interaction.
Today’s lesson dealt with a very important writing skill – summarizing – which you will be required to use very often in life. You were given practice in summarizing & shown samples of good summaries.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
262
VU
Lesson -42
Tenses and Passive Sentences
In this lesson first, we shall discuss verb tenses and the problems they pose for learners of English and next we shall examine passive tenses.
In an English sentence, the verb is the most important word. It is through the action described by the verb that the sentence comes alive. As a result, the verb is the lifeblood of the sentence.
Among other properties, verbs tell time by specifying when the action occurred. This time feature is known as tense.
1. The Base Form:
It is the form in which verbs are listed in the dictionary. It is used for the present tense for all subjects except third - person singular subjects.
2. Past Tense Form:
The past-tense form of most verbs is formed by adding -ed or -d to the basic form.
3. Present Participle:
It is the -ing form of a verb. The present participle is the form that is used with the helping verbs am, is, are, was, or were to show continuing action.
- Jo is spreading the sheet on the ground.
As I was gathering the clothes on the line, the wind blew away some of them.
4. Past Participle:
The past participle of a verb is usually the same as its past tense form. The past participle is the form that is used with the helping verbs have, has, and had and with am, is, are, was, were.
Here are the main parts of the regular verbs.
Basic Form | Past Tense Form | Present Participle | Past Participle |
Jump | jumped | jumping | jumped |
Smile | smiled | smiling | smiled |
Hope | hoped | hoping | hoped |
Main Tenses:
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
263
VU
There are six main tenses in English. They are present, past, future, present perfect, past perfect and future perfect.
The following chart shows the six basic tenses of the verb ‘jump’
Tense Present Past Future
Present perfect Past perfect Future perfect
Example I jump
I jumped
I will jump
I have jumped I had jumped
I will have jumped
We shall now look at these tenses in greater detail.
1. The Present Tense:
It is used to describe an action that is happening in the present or to describe a condition that exists at the present time regardless of the other verbs in the sentence. Susan works in
The Historical Present: The present tense is used to make more vivid description of some past actions through a restatement or a summarization of the facts from a book or a report etc….
The historical present is used when we write about events or happenings in a work of literature. The rationale for using the present tense is that the happenings of literature are unchangeable and therefore are permanently true.
2. The Past Tense:
It is used to describe an action or state of being that occurred some time in the past.
It is used to indicate an action which is to take place in the future or a state or condition that will exist some time in the future.
You can form the future tense by placing will or shall before the verb. In the past, the use of will and shall was prescribed but in today’s language usage, will is typically used to express ordinary future tense and shall is used to express a demand or is used with laws, policies or contracts.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
264
VU
The Three Perfect Tenses are formed by adding the helping verb have, has, or had to the past participle of the verb. The past participle of a regular verb is simply the form that ends in -ed.
The present perfect tense is formed when we add has or have plus the past participle.
5. The Past Perfect Tense:
It describes an action that was completed in the past before another past action. The past perfect tense is formed when we add had plus the past participle.
6. Future Perfect Tense:
It describes an action that will be completed before some time in the future.The future perfect tense is formed when we add shall have or will have to the past participle. By the end of the year, the contractors will have completed the new block.
The Three Progressive Tenses: As their name suggests, these tenses express actions still in progress at a particular time. They are made by adding a form of the helping verb -be to the -ing form of the verb.
1. Present Progressive Tense:
It expresses an action taking place at this moment or that will occur some time in the future.
2. Past Progressive Tense:
It expresses an action that was in progress at a certain time in the past.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
265
VU
3. Future Progressive Tense:
It expresses an action that will be in progressive at a certain time in the future.
Unnecessary shift in tense:
Practice 1.
Spot the wrong tense word.
Practice 2:
Spot the tense shifts.
In his oversized T-shirt, the little boy looked even smaller than he was. His skinny arms stretch out of the flopping sleeves that reach down to his wrists. He needed a haircut; he has to push his hair out of his eyes to see. His eyes fail to meet those of the people passing by as he asked them, ‘Can you give me five rupees”?
Practice 3.
Spot the verb in each sentence that is not in the same tense as the others.
Review:
Fill in the blanks where required with the correct word.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
266
VU
be to the) -s, -ing or –ed?) form of the verb.
Active and Passive Voices
Structure of Active Voice Sentences
Subject The estate management | Verb will prosecute | Direct Object trespassers | Complement | |
Passengers | may purchase | tickets | at any airline office | |
Students | use | computers | in the laboratory | |
You | should take | the medicine | once daily | |
Structure of Active Voice Sentences | ||||
Subject | Verb | Direct Object | Complement | |
1. The estate management | will prosecute | trespassers | | |
2. Passengers | may purchase | tickets | at any airline office | |
3. Students | use | computers | in the laboratory | |
4. You | should take | the medicine | once | |
Structure of Passive Voice Sentences
Subject
1.Trespassers
Verb
will be prosecuted may be purchased
Complement
2.Tickets
at any airline office
3.Computers
are used
in the laboratory
4.The medicine
should be taken
once daily
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
267
VU
Formation of Passive Sentences
A passive sentence is composed of the following parts. Subject + some tense of BE + Past Participle + Agent.
Verb Tenses in Passive Sentences
PRESENT TENSES
Simple Present:
Jewels are bought by ladies.
Present Continuous:
Jewels are being bought by ladies
Present Perfect:
Ladies have been advised to declare their jewelry in their wealth tax forms.
Present Modals:
Steps must be taken to educate the public about filling in tax returns.
PAST TENSES
Simple Past:
Maps of the rebel’s hide-outwere shown to the press.
Past continuous:
Until recently hand crafted jewelry was not being designed locally.
Past Perfect:
Pakistani carpets had always been designed by local artists.
Perfect Modals:
The textile industry might not have been required by the government to pay taxes.
FUTURE TENSES
‘will’ - Teaching assistants will be used to assist teachers in evaluating students’ examination scripts.
‘going to’ - Factories are going to be built in the new export promoting zone.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
268
VU
Future Perfect
- By 2010 the new canal system will have been put into regular use.
The Agent in Passive Sentences:
A passive sentence can be written with or without the agent.
With the Agent:
The agent in passive sentence answers the question by whom or by what the action is performed.
1. The agent is named if it is important or necessary to complete the meaning or understanding of the sentence. e.g.
- The accident was caused by a cyclist.- Noise in our neighborhood is produced by trains.
Without the Agent:
The agent in a passive sentence is not named under certain conditions.
1. When the identity of the agent is understood and does not have to be mentioned. e.g.
-Pakistan television newscasts are translated into both English and Arabic. (by someone)
-An error has been made in the computer input data (by someone)
USES OF PASSIVE
If you are writing a paper about a discovery, the use of passive will focus on the discovery. But if you were to write with active verbs, the reader might think your paper is about the person who made the discovery and not the discovery itself.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
269
VU
Lesson -43 Word Order
In many of the lessons on writing and, even in those on reading, we looked at how ideas are organized and put together or connected within and between sentences. In today’s lesson we shall look at the way certain words like adverbs, which cause problems to learners of English, are placed in the sentence. We are going to look at ways words are positioned or ordered in an English sentence and give you some practice in their use. The words are:
1. Verb & Object
A) In English the verb and its object usually go together. Other words are not put between them. e.g
V
I like
O
animals very much.
I like very much animals.
I not only lost all my money, I lost also my jewelry.
B) Place and Time
(1) In English the place (where?) is mentioned before the time (when? How often? How long?) e.g
270
VU
Practice 1:
Decide whether the word order is right (R) or wrong (W)
(b) Sometimes when a verb is composed of two or more words such as can remember, doesn’t drive, has / have been eaten; the adverb is put after the first part of the verb.
| V1 | ADV | V2 |
He | can | never | remember my name |
I | don’t | usually | smoke |
| Are you | definitely | resigning? |
Your bike | has | probably | been stolen |
- He probably won’t see you. OR
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
In negative sentences probably goes before the negative. So we have:
271
VU
- I will probably not see you.
Practice 2:
Decide whether the underlined words are in the correct order. Use W for wrong and R for right.
(3) The position of still, yet, anymore, any longer, no longer in a sentence
Still is used to say that a situation or action is continuing. Still usually is used in the middle of the sentence with the verb. e.g
-Do you still want to go to the post office, or have you changed your mind?
Yet is used to ask if something has happened or when we say that something has not happened.
Yet is used mainly in questions and negative sentences.
Yet is usually found at the end of the sentence. e.g.
-We’re hungry. Is dinner ready yet?
Yet is often used with the present perfect (Have you finished washing that dress yet?). Compare still and yet in the following sentences.
Still is possible in negative sentences.
-She said she would be here half an hour ago, and she still hasn’t come.
‘She still hasn’t come’ shows a stronger feeling of impatience as can be seen from the following sentences:
-She still hasn’t called me (she should have called before now)
not … anymore, not… any longer and no… longer are used to say that a situation has changed. Anymore, and any longer come at the end of the sentence
- Miss Mir doesn’t work here anymore / any longer.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
272
VU
No longer comes in the middle of the sentence.
But ‘no more’ cannot be used in this way. You can have:
Practice 3:
Change the following sentences using still and not …. anymore.
- Mother is still in hospital but she isn’t in critical condition anymore.
4. I used to like Kathy and Karen (still / Kathy but…)
- I still like Kathy but not Karen anymore.
5. He was a good batsman, and he was the best in the team. (still / good batsman but)
- He is still a good batsman but isn’t the best in the team anymore.
6. I was feeling depressed and homesick. (still / depressed but….)
- I am still feeling depressed but not homesick anymore.
-He didn’t get the job, although he had all the necessary qualifications.
A noun, a pronoun or -ing is used after in spite of / despite.
Note:‘In spite’ takes ‘of ’ but ‘despite’ doesn’t
Compare although and in spite of / despite.
- I couldn’t sleep, although I was tired.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
VU
- I couldn’t eat, despite being hungry.
(B) Sometimes though is used instead of although. This happens more often in spoken English with though coming at the end of a sentence.
-I meet her everyday. I’ve never spoken to her though.
Even though is a more emphatic form of although.
Practice 4:
(A). Complete these sentences by using although and a phrase from the box.
It was quite chilly
She had been rude to them. I had never seen my aunt.
He holds an important office He had promised to be on time`
Practice 4:
(B). Complete the following sentences with ‘although’ or ‘in spite of’.
Practice 4:
(C). Using the words in the brackets make sentences with though at the end.
1. He’s very nice. (Don’t like / wife).
-2. Its very warm. (windy).
-3. We didn’t like the pudding (ate).
- Her driving is not very good; even I could drive better.
273
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
274
VU
- She always wears a shawl even in summer.
(B) Very often ‘even’ is used with the verb in the middle of a sentence.
Here are some examples with not even:
(C) ‘Even’ is often used with the ‘comparative form’.
(D) ‘Even’ is used with ‘if ’, ‘when’ and ‘though’.
Practice 5:
Complete these sentence with even + a comparative
6. Use of As (Time) and As (Reason)
A) As (time) can be used to refer to two things happening together or over the same period of time:
‘As’ is used especially for two short actions, happening at the same time.
-Hamid arrived as I left (he arrived & I left at the same).
Just as (= exactly at that moment) is also very commonly used.
As is also used when two changes happen over the same period of time
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
275
VU
- I began to enjoy the work as I got used to it
B) As (time): You can use as to show one thing happening during another i.e. in the middle of doing something else. When ‘as’ is used in this way, both actions are usually quite short.
The use of just as is also very common.
Note:Do not use as if one action follows another. e.g.
(Meaning because I was tired….)
C) As (reason): meaning ‘because’
- As I was feeling tired, I went to bed early.
Practice 6:
Rewrite the following sentences showing one thing happens during another.
7. Use of Like and AS
A) Like means similar to/the same as for example:
Like is a preposition, so it is followed by
– ing :
like a picture, like your job
like me, like this
like walking, like crying
- “What’s that sound?” ‘Sounds like crying’.
B) As is used before a subject + verb.
- Don’t move anything. Leave everything as it is.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
276
VU
Compare like and as in the following sentences:
Note: You say as usual not like usual.
You’re late like usual.
C) As + S + V can have other meanings.
You can also say as you know / as we expected / as I said.
We use as + N to say something really is / was especially when we talk about someone’s job or how we use something.
-We don’t have a car, so we use the garage as a store room.
We use like when we compare things.
Practice 7:
Put in like or as in the following sentences.
In today’s lesson we looked at the order in which certain words occur. The words we looked at often pose problems for learners of English in their writing. I hope today’s lesson clarified the use of these words.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
277
VU
Lesson -44
Articles and Their Use:
Now a days grammarians divide English words into two categories - major and minor. In the major category are words like nouns, verbs, adjectives and adverbs. These are sometimes called CONTENT words because they carry the main meaning in communication e.g. they’re the words that you would send in a telegram “Arriving PK 421 Sunday” “Send money broke”
In the minor category are determiners, pronouns, prepositions and conjunctions.
Minor words express or signal subtle shades of meaning, obvious information, or redundant grammatical information i.e. words that perform no particular function. Minor class words occur more frequently than members of major classes. There are around 50 of these words and they are very common. All of these fifty words are function words; they make up about 60% of words that are used in speech and about 45% of those that are used in writing.
These minor words are like bricks that cement together the content words. For this reason minor words are also known as structure words.
(1) Determiners are a class of minor words. A determiner is a word which precedes or comes before nouns and adjectives e.g.
Major / Content words – Noun, Verb, Adjective, Adverb
Minor / Function words – Determiners, Pronouns,Prepositions, Conjunctions
Determiners come before nouns & adjectives
There are 5 main types of determiners.
The reason why we are going to look at articles is that Pakistani learners of English make the most mistakes in the use of articles. They insert articles where they are not required and do not use them where they are required.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
VU
In today’s lesson we shall only examine articles, a subclass of determiners in detail. There are 2 articles in English, the definite ‘the’ and the indefinite. a / an. Articles are easily recognized and indicate that a noun follows, but sometimes nouns require no articles. While articles have a single function: they modify or the head noun in a noun phrase, their meaning is quite complex.
1. Forms Of The Articles:
Pronunciation: The spelling of the indefinite article ‘a’ and the pronunciation of both the definite and indefinite articles depend on the initial sound of the word that follows. Articles are normally not stressed, but may be stressed for the sake of emphasis.
278
The unstressed definite article is always written ‘the’ and is pronounced / consonants and / i/ before vowels. The indefinite article ‘a’ is pronounced / consonants and -/ n/- before vowels. e.g.
the girl, the pilot, the bridge the aunt, the egg, the octopus
/ before
/ before
a girl, a pilot, a bridge
an apple, an octopus, an egg.
The stressed definite article / i/ is used to show excellence or superiority in some way e.g.
2. Article Usage:
The general rules are:
(a). The definite article ‘the’ can be used with all kinds of nouns except most proper nouns. sing. count nouns: the dog / child / train
plural count nouns: the dogs / children / trains Sing. mass nouns: the silver / water
(b) The indefinite article ‘a/ an’ can normally only be used with singular count nouns: e.g. a ball / child / exams
plural count nouns: (some) balls/children/ exams singular mass nouns: (some) silver/milk/ knowledge
For other nouns the zero article i.e. no article at all is used for indefinite meaning.
Look at the following table which summarizes the above rules.
Definite meaning the train
the trains
Indefinite meaning a train
(some) trains
sing. count noun pl. count noun
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
279
VU
mass noun the silver
3. Use of The Definite Article:
(some) silver
When we use the definite article ‘the’, it indicates that a hearer or reader can identify the thing referred to, or know what is being talked about. e.g.
I saw the film (reader/hearer knows which one)
But this is not the case when we use the indefinite article ‘a’ / ‘an’ e.g.
I saw a film (reader / hearer doesn’t know which one).
If we want to express indefinite meaning of amount, etc., we use the indefinite article a (n) with sing. count nouns or plural count nouns. e.g.
(zero indef. article with mass noun ‘chocolate’
a girl, the chair,
nouns showing ‘more than one’: two girls, five chairs
advertising, music, butter,evidence, etc.
There are 4 conditions in which definite meaning arises. We use the definite article for: (1)
Referring – Back Use: When identity has been established by an earlier mention e.g.
- Saba bought a TV and a video recorder, but she returned the video recorder (second mention).
(2) Forward-Pointing Use: When identity is established by the post modification that follows the noun: e.g.
- Saba returned the view-recorder she bought yesterday.
- What’s in the paper(s) today?
Sometimes ‘the’ may be omitted in the institutional use.
The definite article ‘the’ has a Generic or Typical use when it refers to what is general or typical for a whole class of things. This use of ‘the’ is found with count. Nouns. e.g.
Here ‘the’ indicates the class of birds, not one individual member of the class.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
280
VU
iii) A peacock is a beautiful bird.
(generic use of the indefinite singular).
You will have noticed that sentence 1 expresses the same meaning as sentences 2 & 3. Now this means that when we are dealing with a whole class of things the difference between definite and indefinite, singular and plural are apt to lose their significance.
We can say the peacock (generic) refers to the species as a whole, while a peacock (generic) refers to any member of the species. We can say:
The peacock is in danger of becoming extinct
But not:
A peacock is in danger of becoming extinct.
Let us look at the use of the definite article with nouns.The following table illustrates the ways of expressing generic meaning.
Count Nouns Mass Nouns
the peacock a peacock peacocks
water
5. Specific vs Generic Meaning:
Another way of explaining the use of the definite article is to look at it from the specific vs generic meaning. The following examples illustrate the use of the definite article with generic or typical meaning.
But see how the following nouns take the definite article.
Specific use
a) Pass the butter please.
Generic use
Butter is imported now a day.
b )The acting was poor but the music was super.
I simply love acting and music.
c) Before you visit Japan, you ought to learn
the language.
Linguistics is the study of language.
Notice that in English, mass nouns and plural nouns are treated as generic and they do not take the definite article. When these nouns (mass & plural) are modified by an – of phrase the definite article is normally used, especially with abstract mass nouns.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
281
VU
The following table will make this clear.
the history of Japan the society of Pakistan
the architecture of early Moghal period the behavior of children
We find that with concrete mass nouns and plural nouns ‘the’ can be omitted as in
-eighteenth century furniture
-tropical birds
(the) furniture of eighteenth century
(the) birds of the tropics
6. Adjectives & Group Nouns:
‘The’ is also used with adjectives to show:
i)
a class of people: - the poor, the rich, the disabled, the wealthy, the handicapped
OR
to denote an abstract quality: the sublime, the ridiculous, the absurd.
ii)
‘The’ is also used with adjectives showing nationality especially those ending in ‘ch’ or ‘sh’ e.g.
-the Dutch, the English, the French, the Spanish
‘The’ is also used with group nouns like:
-the aristocracy, the public, the administration, the government which can be used with either a singular or a plural verb e.g.
7. Some Common Nouns Without Article:
The following is a list of groups of common nouns without article, which occur mainly in idiomatic expressions. These are given under column I. Under Column II are examples where the article is used:
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
282
VU
I
II
A) Institutions
bed church prison hospital
lie down on the bed
walk past the church drive by the prison live by the hospital
be in go to
school college sea university
go into the school
the college tower has collapsed look out towards the sea
work at the University
be at
be at home, go home be in town, leave town
approach the town
(B) Means of Transport (no article)
(With article)
by bike/bicycle by bus
by boat/ship by train
by plane
ride on the bicycle catch the bus
get on the boat get into the train get off the plane
come leave travel
(C) Times of the Day
at down, at daybreak
during the day
| at sunrise, at sunset | admire the sunrise/sunset |
meet | at noon, at midnight | in the afternoon |
leave | at dusk, at twilight | invisible in the dusk |
| at night, by night | wake up in the middle of the night |
(D) Meals (no article)
have breakfast/lunch/tea dinner/supper
(with article)
Were you at the lunch for the stars?
Have you made the tea? The dinner was well cooked.
Dinner is at eight
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
283
VU
(E) Parallel Phrases
(no article)
They walked arm in arm They walked hand in hand
(with article)
She took him by the arm. A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush.
She’s the wife of a famous pop star.
They are husband and wife
ARTICLES AND PROPER NOUNS:
Proper nouns usually take no articles.
A. Personal Name: James Brown, Hilary Shaw, but - the President of the United States of America - the Lord (God) - the Duke of Edinburgh
Family Terms:
No article is used in the vocative
B. Calendar Items
a) Names of Festivals: Christmas, Eid, Independence Day, Republic Day b)
c)
Names of the months & the days of week: January, February, Monday, Tuesday
Names of seasons may have the article omitted:
… I met them in summer
BUT
…. in the summer of 1945
Geographical Names
Normally there is no article whether the name is pre-modified a)Names of continents
(Central) Asia, (East) Africa
b) Names of Countries
Ancient Bhutan (Victorian) England
modern Pakistan (medieval) India
Exceptions: The Sahara, the Punjab, the Lebanon, the Middle Crimea.
c) Cities & Towns: Rome, Lahore, Karachi, Sibi
East, theUkraine, the
Exceptions: The Hague, The West End
-The Himalayas, the Alps, The Rockies
-The Austins (meaning ‘the Austin family)
-The Netherlands, the Midlands
-The Indus, the Ravi, the Atlantic, the Pacific
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
284
VU
-The Suez Canal, the Panama Canal
f) Public Places
-hotels & restaurants
-cinemas, clubs
-museum,
- the British Museum
g) Magazines & periodicals normally have no article: Newsweek, Time, Punch, Mag, New Scientist.
Practice 1:
Insert an article where you think it is needed
1.
2.
3.
4.
We went to most expensive restaurant in town. Do you want to watch television this evening? Last night we went out for meal in restaurant.
Braille is a system of reading and writing by touch for blind.
Practice 2:
Choose the correct form, with or without ‘the’
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
I am afraid of dogs / the dogs
Can you pass salt / the salt, please?
Women / the women are sometimes better teachers than men / the men Second World War / The Second World War ended in 1945.
All books /All the books on the top shelf belong to me Tom left college / the college without taking his exams. After the work / work Ann usually goes to the home/ home.
Practice 3:
Some of the following sentences are correct, but some need the definite article. Can you spot those that need correction?
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Next year we are going skiing in Swiss Alps. Nile is longest river in Africa.
There are many different languages spoken in Far East.
They now live in the United Arab Emirates / United Arab Emirates. South of England is warmer than north.
United Kingdom consists of Great Britain and Northern Ireland. Plains of Punjab are very hot in May and June.
Malta has been a republic since 1974.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
285
VU
Practice 4:
Choose the correct form with or without ‘the’.
1.One of the oldest buildings in Lahore is Old Fort / the Old Fort.
2.
3.
“Which hotel are you staying at?” “At Sheraton / the Sheraton.”
Yesterday I opened an account at Standard Chartered Bank / the Standard
Chartered Bank.
4. Have you ever visited the University of Management Sciences / University of
Management Sciences?
‘Where did you buy those shoes?’‘At Service’s / the Services’.
The President / President of United States / the United States lives in White House / the White House.
“Is there a cinema hall near here?”
“Yes, Odeon / the Odeon on Montgomery Road / the Montgomery Road.
5.
6.
7.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
286
VU
Lesson -45
Language Forms and Functions
Knowing a language means being able to communicate one’s ideas and opinions to others. A foreign learner of a language may know the linguistic rules of the language he is learning
- in your case, English - but unless he or she learns to demonstrate or use this knowledge appropriately, the learner would not be considered fully competent in the language that he / she is learning. In today’s lesson - which is the last lesson of this course - you shall learn about language forms & how they are used to perform functions.
What is a language function? A language function, to put it very simply, is something you want to do with language. The primary function of language is to give factual information and convey essential commands, feelings and emotions. Have you ever asked yourself the question what are people trying to do when they speak? The aims of speaking involve not only broad functions such as conveying information, expressing emotion, keeping in touch socially, and so on…, but also more specific purposes for which language can be used, such as
Utterance
Purpose
do something.
- I’ll pay you next week
How many language functions there are, we do not know exactly. But we do know that there are some language functions that are regularly required for the purposes of normal everyday communication.
The following are some very common language functions.
To be competent in a language, the learner should know how its speakers use the language in ways which cannot be predicted from linguistic rules alone. It means that the learner must be aware of the various devices / structures / forms used by native speakers and writers to knit their speech and writing into a comprehensible whole. This is done by using appropriate forms of the language.
If somebody expresses an opinion and you want to disagree with it, the first thought that will come into your mind is ‘Disagree!’
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
287
VU
The next thing you will do is to decide the language forms or structures that you will use to show your disagreement. i.e. you will decide what grammatical structures, what vocabulary items, what intonation patterns are to be used. There are a variety of forms to choose and use. A great deal depends on the situation and the person you are speaking to. For instance, if the other person is a good friend, you might say, ‘Shut up! It’s not true.”
But if it was your boss or somebody of a higher rank or status than you, you might say. ‘Excuse me, sir / madam; you may not be quite right there.’
So when you speak who you are speaking to, will influence the language you will use. Look at the following example:
A part of a conversation is provided. You have to see what function is being performed by the language used by the speaker (i.e. the underlined words).
Saba: I think Junaid Jamshed is an awful singer. Naila: Do you? I think he’s marvelous.
When Naila says “I think he’s marvelous,” what language function is being carried out? Is she agreeing with Saba? Is she criticizing Junaid Jamshed? Or is she admiring him?
Because Naila’s answer is ‘I think he’s marvelous’ it means that she admires the singer. So we can say she is admiring him. If she was criticizing him she would not have used these words of admiration.
Now you shall have some practice, first in identifying or describing functions and second in identifying statements which illustrate the function required.
I.Identifying Functions:
Parts of conversation / sentences are provided. Choose from the four alternatives given the one which best describes the functions of the underlined part of the conversation.
Saleh: At the rate he's driving we won’t get to the airport in time, you know.
Hina: Too late!… Such a beautiful vase.
a. to express fear
b. to express sympathy
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
VU
c. to express admiration
d. to express dismay
6. Faraz: I hope you don’t mind my saying this but what you’ve first said is not exactly true.
a.
b.
c.
d.
288
sympathize scold disagree surprise
7. Sara: If you want to increase the literacy rate you must educate women and girls. Zara: I think the same as you.
Zain: Why don’t you open it now and see who is it from ? Faraz: It can wait.
Secretary: I’m sorry, sir.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
289
VU
d. to demand
10. John: Have you heard the news? The vice principal is getting the sack. Jane: Oh. No!
11. Jill: How about going to the theatre tonight? Pat: Sorry. I’ve work to do.
B. Extended conversation
For each underlined statement or question select one response to indicate its function.
1. Father: Sajid, I don’t like your moving around with that friend of yours.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
290
VU
d. sympathy
C. Conversation on the telephone:
Mother: Yes. What is it? You’re all right, aren’t you ?
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
291
VU
From the four responses given choose the most appropriate which best matches the function given.
1. Zohra: You wanted the telephone number of the girls hostel. Well, I’ve managed to get it for you.
Jabeen: (to show gratitude)
a.
b.
c.
d.
I’ve already got it That’s very kind of you Tell me the number Yes, good.
2. Saira: I’m leaving college. I’m thinking of taking up a job.
Bina: (to discourage)
a.
b.
That’s an interesting idea How foolish
c. Is it well paid?
d. I wouldn’t do that if I were you.
3. Mina: Would it be possible for you to return the money I lent you?
Sana: (to express regrets)
a.
b.
c.
d.
I’m sorry. Not till the end of the week. Which money?
I clean forgot. Sure I will.
4. Wendy: Do you think you would be able to the money by the end of this month?
(to promise)
Depends when I get my salary Give me some more time.
Cindy:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Sure, I’ll give it back on time. I’m broke.
5. Manager: Your work is not up to the mark. You’ll have to work harder to stay in this company.
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
292
VU
Employee: (to express an intention) How can you say that?
You’re biased.
I’m sorry I’ll try harder. I do my best.
a.
b.
c.
d.
6. Andy: There’s a vacancy in my factory. Would you be willing to work here?
Brenda: (to show interest)
a.
b.
c.
d.
I’m well settled over here. I’ll think over it.
Can you arrange an interview for me? What’s the package being offered?
a.
b.
c.
d.
7. Aziz: I’ve just heard Abida is returning from London tomorrow morning.
Bina: (to express surprise)
Yes, that right. She wrote to me about it. Sorry. What did you say ?
It’s not tomorrow but the day after.
No. I can’t believe it ! Tomorrow did you say?
8. Mechanic: I’ve checked your car. The engine is fine. It doesn’t need any repairs.
Car owner: (to express relief)
a.
b.
c.
d.
You sure? Thank you.
Thank God for that. Good old car.
a.
b.
c.
d.
7. Saad: I’m sorry I can’t accompany you.
Fahd: Why?
Saad: (to give a reason)
Why don’t you take someone else with you? I can if you really want me to.
My mother’s not well. It’s been very hot lately.
10. Statement: Illiteracy is a serious problem in our country.
( to ask if someone else agrees).
a.
b.
c.
d.
You understand my point? What’s your opinion?
Have you been told this before? Wouldn’t you say so?
Recap and Final Exam
The Final Exam will consist of all that we have covered in our lessons. For any surprises just depend on your common sense and any background knowledge you have of English. Please go over the lessons and focus on the following:
Reading Comprehension
© Copyright Virtual University of Pakistan
293
VU
Vocabulary
Main Ideas and Supporting Ideas Topic Sentences of Paragraphs
The Different Organization Patterns of Essays
The functions of Introduction, Body and Conclusion in an Essay Continuity and Transition Devices